JP2020000913A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: Discrimination is executed by discrimination means based on satisfaction of discrimination conditions, and a privilege game advantageous to a player is executed by privilege game execution means based on a specific discrimination result as a result of the discrimination of the discrimination means. While a first element relating to a degree of advantage of a player in a privilege game is more advantageous when game balls are continuously shot in a first direction than the game balls are continuously shot in a second direction during a specific period included in an execution period of the privilege game, a second element relating to the degree of advantage of the player becomes more advantageous when game balls are continuously shot in the second direction than game balls are continuously shot in the first direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the privilege game. Thus, player's interest in a game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a win. In such a gaming machine, a predetermined game value is given to a player by causing a game ball to enter a special winning opening that is opened during a winning state, so that the player is provided with one pleasure to win. Can play the game.

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, during the hit state, there may be a case where the player simply shoots the game ball in a predetermined direction aiming at the winning opening, so that the player's There was a problem that it was difficult to improve the interest in the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is based on a first direction, a launching means capable of launching at least a game ball in a second direction different from the first direction, and a determination condition being satisfied. Discriminating means for executing a discriminating operation, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discriminating means, and an advantage of the player in the privilege game. The first element relating to the degree is determined by the game direction in which the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction, rather than the game ball being continuously fired in the second direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the privilege game. The first element advantage means, which is advantageous to the player, and the second element different from the first element are provided in the second direction rather than the game balls being continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period. Player who keeps firing ball Comprising a second element advantageously means that advantageously, a.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, a game ball fired in the first direction and a game ball fired in the second direction are provided at positions where at least a ball can enter. Ball entry means, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means, and a first ball which allows the game ball to enter the ball entry means. A position, a variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position, and a predetermined number of times the variable means is determined during execution of the privilege game; Variable control means for changing from the second position to the first position.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the first element advantage-making means is configured to execute the bonus game in a second direction during the execution period of the special bonus game, rather than continuing to launch the game ball in the second direction. The one in which the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction increases the ratio of entering the ball into the ball entry means.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the second or third aspect, the second element favoring means is configured to play a game ball in the second direction rather than continuously firing a game ball in the first direction. When the ball is continuously fired, the number of game balls reaching the ball entry means during the specific period is increased.

  According to a fifth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect, the variable control means is configured to execute a predetermined first period after the variable means is changed to the first position. The first variable operation to be changed to the second position is performed the first number of times during the specific period, and the second element advantage means is configured to execute the first direction in the first direction after the specific period is started. To prevent the game balls fired at the predetermined number of times from reaching the ball entry means until the execution period of the first variable operation ends. Is a period during which the game balls fired in the second direction can reach after the specific period is started.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the determination is performed based on the first direction and the firing means capable of firing at least the game ball in the second direction different from the first direction, and the determination condition is satisfied. Discriminating means, privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and a first element relating to the degree of advantage of the player in the privilege game It is more advantageous for the player that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the privilege game. The first element advantageous means and the second element different from the first element are used to cause the game ball to be fired in the second direction rather than to continue to be fired in the first direction during the specific period. The second important thing that the player who continues is advantageous to the player It comprises a preferred means, a.

  As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, at least a game ball fired in the first direction and a game ball fired in the second direction are inserted. A ball entry means provided at a position where a ball can be thrown, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means, and a game ball entering the ball entry means. A variable position that can be changed to a first position at which a ball can be thrown and a second position at which it is difficult to enter the ball entry device from the first position, and the variable device is set in advance during execution of the privilege game. Variable control means for changing from the second position to the first position for a predetermined first number of times.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest during the execution of the bonus game can be further improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the second aspect, the first element advantage-making means is configured to play a game ball in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. Since the rate at which the game ball continues to be fired in the first direction increases the rate of entering the ball entry means, the rate of entry to the ball entry means is higher than that at which the game ball continues to be fired. There is an effect that a player who wants to play a game during execution of the privilege game in the gaming property can positively fire the game ball in the first direction.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the second or third aspect, the second element advantage-improving unit is configured such that a game ball is continuously fired in the first direction. Since the direction in which the game balls continue to be fired in the second direction increases the number of game balls reaching the ball entry means during the specific period, more game balls are sent to the ball entry means. There is an effect that a player who wants to reach can positively fire a game ball in the second direction.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, the variable control means may determine the first predetermined position after the variable means is changed to the first position. The first variable operation that is changed to the second position after a period has elapsed is executed the first number of times during the specific period, and the second element advantageous means starts the specific period. After that, the game balls fired in the first direction are prevented from reaching the ball entry means before the execution period of the first variable operation of a predetermined number of times ends. At least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation is a period in which a game ball fired in the second direction can reach after the specific period is started.

  Thereby, the player who shoots the game ball in the second direction sends the game ball to the ball input means during the execution of the first variable operation a larger number of times than when the player plays the game ball in the first direction. Since it is possible to reach the ball, there is an effect that the chance of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be increased.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of a three-symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display mode displayed on the third-symbol display device in the first embodiment. FIG. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the continuous announcement effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the continuous announcement effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. In the first embodiment, the change with time of the effect mode from the time when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined in a state where the number of the reserved balls is two to the time when the one-time variable display is executed after the end of the continuous announcement effect. It is the figure which showed typically. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4C is a diagram schematically illustrating the prescribed contents of a second random number table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2A is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. It is a figure which showed the content typically, (c) is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the variation pattern (for normal) in 1st Embodiment, (d) is 1st execution. It is the figure which showed typically the prescribed | regulated content of the deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table in a form. It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. . It is the figure which showed typically the specified content of the notice selection table in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for describing an outline of logical sum data generated when a notice lottery prohibition state is released in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram explaining the back surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a stop command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notice effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a V interruption process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed several command processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing an error command process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process performed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a configuration of a random number range selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the second embodiment. And (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a winning random number range pattern table. (A) is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment. is there. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a point selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a random number random number table in the second embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a selection table for release in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed starting winning processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed random number range command processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating stop command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect setting process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment. (B) is a value of a high expectation type flag and an expectation of a lottery result in the third embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship with the above. It is the flowchart which showed the winning information command processing 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the stop command process 3 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect setting process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the lottery state after a jackpot winning in 4th Embodiment. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning information command processing 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the cancellation | release time determination process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a modification of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to a modification of the fourth embodiment. It is the block diagram shown. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the ending selection table in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command processing 5 performed by the MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the detour role thing in a 5th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode during a big hit displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view showing a state where the opening / closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment is closed, and (b) is an opening door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view showing a state in the middle of the operation. (A) is a sectional view showing a state in which the opening and closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment is completely opened, and (b) is a sectional view of the opening and closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment. It is sectional drawing which showed the state which was completely closed. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the temporal change of the state of the right specific winning opening when the open pattern allowing V winning is set in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the sixth embodiment. In the embodiment, it is a diagram schematically showing a temporal change of the state of the right specific winning opening 650a when an opening pattern in which a V winning is difficult is set. (A)-(d) is a figure which showed in more detail the state of the opening / closing door during one opening period when the opening pattern which can win V in the 6th Embodiment is set. In the sixth embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device at the start of one round of a jackpot in which an open pattern capable of winning a V is set. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the main control device according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the regulation. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM of a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed the big hit end processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed abnormal processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode of the 3rd symbol display device in a probable change state and a time saving state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 7th embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment, (b) is main control in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the device. It is a flow chart which showed special design change processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed starting winning processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the prefetching process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd modification of 7th Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a game ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 guides the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches the game ball to the front area of the game board 13 and the game ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A firing rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and has a window portion 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is provided on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible through the glass unit 16 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  An upper plate 17 for storing game balls protrudes forward and is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the front frame 14, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the game balls introduced into the upper plate 17 are guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two stages, a “sand beach stage” and a “deep sea stage”. ing. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “sand beach stage” → “the deep sea stage” "→" Sandy beach stage "→ ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, a “sand beach stage” is set as an initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. At the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying during the payout of award balls and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball-lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the game ball is operated in accordance with the operation. Is lent. More specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly rented to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 is unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion 40 to have a common component configuration. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface in a central portion thereof. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a game ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided. Sensor 51a, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball during a pressing operation, and a variable for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. A resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The game ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes in response to the change, so that the game ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  A ball release lever 52 for operating the game balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided below the lower plate 50 in a front view. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. Game balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving game balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of the ball. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Is a region in which the water flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided for guiding game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and a situation in which the game ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is prevented. At the end of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the game ball. The momentum is rebounded toward the center while being damped. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when a game ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (when a game ball passes through the normal entrance 67). Lottery of the second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance opening 64, it is determined whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, wins for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 game balls). ) Is released, and the release is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of game balls wins in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpots, "Big Jackpot A" and "Big Jackpot B". (Game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when a special symbol (first symbol) is selected, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display a special symbol, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds), The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a game ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to four times, and the number of retained balls is increased to the first symbol. This is shown by the display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the special game state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a game ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a large number of game balls enter the first ball opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passing of the game ball at the ordinary entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and a game ball enters the first entrance 64. It becomes easy to do. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, the game ball easily enters the first entrance 64, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a game ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is increased to the first symbol display device 37. , And also at the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the drawing is performed. Be started.

  As described above, two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B", are provided. In the case of "big hit A" and "big hit B", each of the rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16R big hit). When the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special symbol high probability state (during a special symbol change) as an added value after the jackpot. This high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next special symbol jackpot. On the other hand, after the "big hit B" is completed, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times as an added value.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during the probable change of the special symbol). In other words, the special game state (16R jackpot) ) Is the state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is referred to as the special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (medium symbol time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased and a game ball easily enters the first entrance 64. . On the other hand, when it is not the “normal symbol time reduction state”, it is referred to as “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is a normal state (a state where the hit probability is lower than during the time reduction period).

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is common, and after the end of the jackpot according to the type of jackpot, it becomes a “high probability state of the special symbol” Or "normal design time saving state". On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time reduction state” is set may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. Further, as a normal symbol time-saving state, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is increased, or the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened for one normal symbol is increased. Is also good.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a fluctuation display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery, which is performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), is being executed, by a lighting state. As the stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the variation among the game balls inserted into the first entrance 64 is not executed. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of certain game balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a game ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being fluctuated on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is held up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, but three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) can be realized with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors. Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stopped symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicates the type of the jackpot if the jackpot is a jackpot (a jackpot A, a jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 (start prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and displays three symbol columns, for example, left, middle, and right, by controlling the display content by a display control device 114 described later. Is done. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. In addition, you may make it comprise the 3rd symbol display device 81 using a reel etc. instead of a display device.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol, which is a type of symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, is composed of nine types of main symbols, each of which has a number from "1" to "9", and a sub symbol composed of a shell-shaped symbol. It is configured. More specifically, nine types of character designs such as an octopus are numbered "1" to "9" to form a main design. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a big hit, a fluctuation display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower portions, and about 5/6 of the upper portion is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The lower one-sixth is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a reserved ball number symbol indicating the reserved ball number, a notice character, and the like.

  On the display screen (display area) of the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, an interruption, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1” are arranged. , A main symbol of “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols of 10 main symbols and 10 sub symbols. Then, on the display screen, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with a periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, in the main display area Dm, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen (see FIG. 4A). Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of the symbols having the same number assigned to any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of .about.Z3 is finished, it is determined that a big hit has occurred and a big hit moving image is displayed.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “normal symbols”. When the "big hit B" which is the 16R normal big hit occurs, the same combination of the normal symbols is stopped and displayed. The main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “probable symbols”. When the same combination of probability change symbols is stopped and displayed, a "big hit A" which is a 16R probability change big hit occurs. In addition, in a part of the case where the “big hit A” occurs, after the same combination of the normal symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, an effect (so-called promotion effect) in which the normal symbol is changed to the positively changing symbol is executed. You. As a result, even when the normal symbols are aligned (or are likely to be aligned), it is possible to allow the player to have a sense of expectation for the probability jackpot continuously.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, and the The number of symbols and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a configuration may be employed in which only numbers are variably displayed as symbols.

  Also, if a game ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, one reserved ball number symbol (a symbol of “○”) is displayed for each number of retained balls, and the number of reserved balls is determined according to the number of displayed retained ball symbols. The number of balls is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number symbol is reserved. Indicates that the number of balls is four. In addition, when the number-of-retained-balls symbol is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. The example of FIG. 4B shows an example in which two symbols of the number of reserved balls are displayed, which indicates that the number of reserved balls is two.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the number of balls entering the first winning opening 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, but three or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81, the number of retained balls is replaced by a numeral on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of retained balls. However, the display may be performed in a different form (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of reserved balls for the maximum reserved number, and displaying the number of reserved balls according to the number of the reserved lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, a continuous announcement effect, which is one type of display effect in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described. The continuous announcement effect is an effect in which an announcement effect of the same system is executed over a plurality of continuous fluctuation displays. Whether or not this continuous announcement effect is executable is determined when a new starting prize for the first entrance 64 is detected. When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the execution is performed over a variable display based on the held balls held at the time when a new starting winning is detected and a variable display based on the new starting winning. In addition, although details will be described later, the determination ratio of the continuous announcement effect is higher in the case of the jackpot than in the case where the lottery result of the new start winning is out of order. Therefore, when the continuous announcement effect is executed, it is possible to give the player an expectation of the big hit.

  FIGS. 5A and 5B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display mode of a variable display performed based on a ball other than the ball that is executed last among the balls that are set to have the continuous announcement effect. is there. FIG. 5A shows a state where the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol row Z2 is changing. As shown in FIG. 5A, during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the third symbol having the same numeral attached to the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3 is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 5A, the main symbols with the number “3” are displayed in the middle of the upper symbol column Z1 and on the right side of the lower symbol column Z2, respectively. In addition, as shown in FIG. 5A, the main symbol with the same numeral is displayed in a mode in which the periphery thereof emits light (a mode different from other third symbols). This allows the player to easily recognize that the continuous announcement effect is being executed. Hereinafter, the aspect in which the periphery of the main symbol emits light is referred to as “an aspect in which the aura is covered”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 5B, during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, even when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, the main symbol with the number “3” is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. It is stopped and displayed in a form wearing an aura. As a result, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that a displayed combination of symbols will be a jackpot (a lottery result corresponding to the jackpot is included in the reserved ball) in spite of an out-of-match combination. Can be. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display mode when the last variable display in the continuous announcement effect is being performed. As shown in FIG. 6 (a), when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed in the last fluctuation display of the continuous announcement effect, the same numeral is attached to one of the activated lines. The displayed main symbol is stopped and displayed, and the main symbol with the same numeral is displayed in an aura-wrapped manner. In the example of FIG. 6A, a case is illustrated in which the main symbols with the number “3” are stopped and displayed on the activated line L4. A state in which the one symbol row (middle symbol row Z2) is changing and a main symbol having the same number is displayed stopped on the activated line is referred to as a reach state. In the first embodiment, the reach state is always generated in the last fluctuation display of the continuous announcement effect. That is, the start of the continuous announcement effect can be determined only when the new start winning is a lottery result corresponding to the variable display accompanied by the reach state. With this configuration, at the time when the continuous announcement effect is started, it is possible to make the player recognize that at least the reach state will occur thereafter, so that it is possible to improve the expectation of the player for the jackpot. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, when the reach state occurs, a display area HR1 having a horizontally-long and substantially rectangular shape is formed at the upper right of the main display area Dm, and "reach !!!!!" Is displayed. The display content of the display area HR1 allows the player to more easily understand that the reach state has occurred.

  FIG. 6B shows an example of a display mode in a case where the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in the last variation display of the continuous announcement effect, and a big hit is notified. When the jackpot is announced in the continuous announcement effect, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol wearing the aura, which is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3, is already provided. The stopped main display is stopped and displayed on the activated line where the main symbol is arranged. In other words, an effect is performed in which the same numerals are assigned and the main symbols in the form of auras are aligned on one activated line. FIG. 6B exemplifies a case where the main symbols with the number “3” are aligned on the payline L4. By arranging three main symbols having the same number on the activated line, the player can easily understand that the big hit has been achieved. In addition, in the display area HR1 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, a character “Congratulations !!” is displayed to congratulate that the big hit has been achieved. Thereby, greater satisfaction can be given to the player.

  In the first embodiment, in each variable display in which the continuous announcement effect is set, the main symbols stopped and displayed together with the aura are configured so as to be the main symbols with the same numerals. I have. In other words, in the first variation display of the continuous announcement effect, if the main symbol with the number “3” is stopped and displayed with the aura in each symbol column Z1 to Z3, the second and subsequent variations are displayed. Also in the display, the three main symbols with the number “3” are stopped and displayed in a state of wearing an aura. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the mode of each variable display in one continuous announcement effect.

  Although illustration is omitted, the notice effect performed in each variable display in which the continuous notice effect is set includes a plurality of effects other than the effect (notice effect A) in which the stop symbol is changed to an aura-shaped mode. Exists. Specifically, at the time of stopping the fluctuation of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the effect in which the main symbol with the same number is frozen (notification effect B) and the main symbol with the same numeral hit the lightning bolt. The effect (notification effect C) is provided at least as a type of the continuous notification effect. The notice effect C is a type with the highest expectation of a jackpot, and the notice effect A is a type with the lowest expectation of a big hit. In addition, the expectation degree of the notice effect B is set to be higher than the notice effect A and lower than the notice effect C. In this way, by changing the degree of expectation to be a big hit according to the type of the continuous announcement effect, it is possible to cause the player to perform the game paying attention to the type of the continuous announcement effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a description will be given of a temporal change of the effect mode when the continuous announcement effect is set. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically illustrating a temporal change of the effect mode in a case where a new starting winning is detected and a continuous announcement effect is determined in a state where two reserved balls are present.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when the start winning (winning A in the upper left of FIG. 7) is detected during the normal (ie, no continuous announcement effect is set) variable display in a state where there are two reserved balls. Then, the determination of whether or not the continuous announcement effect is executable is executed. If the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined by the determination based on the winning A, the continuous display over the fluctuating time between the fluctuating display based on the two held balls held at that time and the fluctuating display based on the winning A is performed. Set so that the announcement effect is executed. More specifically, the value of the number of continuous announcement effects 223i indicating the remaining number of continuous announcement effects is set to 3, which is the number of times of execution of the continuous announcement effects, and the type of the determined continuous announcement effects (for the announcement effects A to C). The value of the notice type flag 223k is updated accordingly. As a result, the continuous announcement effect is started from the next variation display (the variation display based on the oldest retained ball held at the time when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined).

  In the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, a state in which the lottery of the continuous announcement effect is prohibited (hereinafter, referred to as an advance announcement lottery prohibited state) is set. This is to prevent (suppress) the continuous announcement effect from being determined redundantly during the execution of the continuous announcement effect. More specifically, even during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, if the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined based on the detection of a new start winning, if the type of the announcement effect is in the middle of the continuous announcement effect, There is a possibility of switching. For example, during the execution of the continuous announcement effect in which the advance announcement effect B is set, a new start winning is detected to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. May be discontinued, and may be switched to the notice effect A from the next change. In other words, by switching from the effect type with relatively high expectation (notification effect B) to the effect type with low expectation (advance effect A), the player may be disappointed. In addition, if a continuous announcement effect of the same effect type is newly determined during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the continuous announcement effect is repeated over the number of times of the number of retained balls held at the start of the continuous announcement effect, and continuously. A notice effect will be performed. This may make it difficult for the player to understand which reserve ball should have a sense of expectation, so that the meaning of the effect may be difficult to understand.

  In addition, as a method of solving these problems, during the execution of the continuous announcement effect that finally comes off, only when a start winning prize corresponding to a jackpot is detected, the determination of whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement effect is permitted. In addition, a method is also conceivable in which the effect type of the continuous announcement effect determined additionally has an expectation degree equal to or higher than the effect type of the running continuous announcement effect. However, in this case, every time a start winning is detected during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, it is necessary to determine a plurality of conditions and perform a control process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect and the type of the announcement. However, there is a problem that the processing load may increase.

  Therefore, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, after the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, after the end of the continuous announcement effect, one variation display (first detected in the announcement lottery prohibition state). Until the end of the variable display based on the winning B), it is prohibited to newly determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the effect type from being switched during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, and to prevent the continuous announcement effect from continuing beyond the number of reserved balls at the start of the continuous announcement effect. Further, at the time of the start winning, it is determined whether or not a preliminary announcement lottery is prohibited (whether or not an advance announcement production prohibition flag 223h described later is ON). Since it is only necessary to perform a simple control of skipping the determination processing of, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 7, during the execution of the three-time variable display in which the continuous announcement effect is set, the above-described announcement lottery prohibition state is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, for example, when the start winning is detected during the execution of the second or third variable display of the continuous announcement effect, the process of determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect for the start winning effect is performed. Is skipped. In addition, the preliminary lottery prohibition state is continued during the execution period of the first variable display after the continuous preliminary announcement effect is completed, and at the time when the first variable display is completed after the continuous preliminary announcement effect is completed. The prohibited state is released. For this reason, if a new start winning is detected during the execution of the first variable display after the continuous announcement effect has been completed, the process of determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed for the start winning is determined by the continuous announcement effect. Skipped as during execution. Thus, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the continuous announcement effect from being restarted immediately after the end of the continuous announcement effect, and the continuous announcement effect from continuing forever. If, after the end of the continuous announcement effect, the continuous announcement effect is allowed to be set from the first variation display executed, the variable display based on the winning start that triggered the start of the first continuous announcement effect ends. After that, the production mode becomes as if the continuous announcement production is continuing. In this case, there is a possibility that the player may not know on which basis the continuous announcement effect has been started, and may misunderstand the meaning of the continuous announcement effect. In other words, the continuous announcement effect is not performed based on the lottery result (variation type) read in advance at the time of the start winning, but is an effect that simply changes the effect mode over a variable number of display times. There is a risk of misunderstanding. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, at least one change display can be executed in a normal mode (a mode not accompanied by a notice effect) after the continuous notice effect is completed. Can be easily understood by the player as to whether or not the game has ended. This makes it easier for the player to understand at what time the change display (the number of the reserved ball) to be executed should have a sense of expectation during the execution of the continuous announcement effect.

  Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, when the notice lottery prohibition state is released, the lottery results of all the reserved balls held at that time are determined, and the determination result is obtained. , It is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. Although the details of the determination method will be described later, by determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect in consideration of the lottery results of all the reserved balls, even though the reserved balls with higher expectations are reserved, It is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous announcement effect from being set based on the reserved ball having a low degree of expectation.

  In other words, if the configuration is such that the timing of detecting the start winning prize is to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed in order from the temporally old reserved ball, the continuous announcement effect without discriminating the temporally new reserved ball. May be determined. In this case, the reserved ball for which the continuous announcement effect has been determined is a lottery result with a relatively low degree of expectation (for example, a retained ball that comes off after a normal reach), and the expected degree is temporally new among the retained balls. If a high holding ball (for example, a holding ball that becomes a jackpot due to a super reach) is included, the expectation degree is set in spite of the continuous announcement effect set for the holding ball with a low expectation. There is a possibility that a continuous announcement effect may not be set for a high holding ball. Therefore, there is a possibility that a sense of expectation for the continuous announcement effect may be lost.

  Conversely, if the timing of detecting the start winning prize is configured to sequentially determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed in order from the temporally new reserved ball, the continuous announcement without discriminating the temporally old reserved ball. The effect may be decided. In this case, the reserved ball for which the continuous announcement effect has been determined is a lottery result with a relatively low degree of expectation (for example, a retained ball that comes off after a normal reach), and the degree of expectation among the temporally old retained balls is low. When a high holding ball (for example, a holding ball that becomes a big hit due to a super reach) is included, the continuous announcement effect is not ended with the holding ball having a high expectation that is executed first, and the expectation degree is not terminated. The continuous announcement effect continues up to the fluctuation display based on the low holding ball. In other words, there is a possibility that the player may have an impression that the continuous announcement effect has the butt recess.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, when the preliminary lottery prohibition state is released, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preliminary announcement effect by taking into account the lottery results of all the reserved balls. A continuous announcement effect that continues to the lottery result with the highest expectation among them can be set. Therefore, despite the fact that the continuous announcement effect was set for the holding ball with low expectation, the continuous announcement effect was not set for the holding ball with high expectation, or the high expectation hold during the continuous announcement effect. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the ball is digested and the reserved ball having a low degree of expectation is digested in the last fluctuation display of the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the continuous announcement effect can be suitably executed.

  In the first embodiment, the announcement lottery prohibition state is configured to be set from the time when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined to the time when the first variable display ends after the end of the continuous announcement effect. However, it is not limited to this. The condition for canceling the notice lottery prohibition state may be set arbitrarily. For example, the number of variable displays in which the notice lottery prohibition state is set may be increased (for example, five times). With such a configuration, between the end of one continuous announcement effect and the start of the next continuous announcement effect, the fluctuation display of more normal modes (an aspect without an announcement effect) is displayed. Since the execution can be executed, it is possible to make the player more surely recognize whether or not one continuous notice effect has ended. In addition, as the number of times of the variable display in which the preliminary lottery prohibition state is set is increased, the chance of determining the continuous advance production is reduced, so that the rarity of the continuous advance production can be increased. Therefore, the player can be made to feel that an unusual effect can be seen just by starting the continuous announcement effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the cancellation condition of the announcement lottery prohibition state is defined by the number of variable displays (after the end of the continuous announcement effect, until one variation display ends). It is not necessarily limited to the number of times of the variable display. For example, the cancellation condition may be determined based on the elapsed time after the end of the continuous announcement effect. More specifically, a configuration may be adopted in which the notice lottery prohibition state is released when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the continuous notice effect. With this configuration, even if there is a player who has ended the game at the same time as the end of the continuous announcement effect, the announcement lottery prohibition state is released if the next player has started the game after a predetermined period has elapsed. A game can be played in a state where the game has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the succeeding player starts the game from the preliminary lottery prohibition state, so that the continuous preliminary announcement effect can be more enjoyed.

  In the first embodiment, the announcement lottery prohibition state is configured to be set from the end of the continuous announcement effect to the end of one variation display, but the announcement is made immediately after the end of the continuous announcement effect. It is good also as composition which cancels a lottery prohibition state. In this case, it may be configured such that the player can easily identify whether or not it is the last variable display of the continuous announcement effect from the effect mode. With this configuration, it is possible to further shorten the period in which the preliminary announcement lottery prohibition state is set, and thus it is possible to further increase the opportunity to execute the continuous preliminary announcement effect. Note that, as a specific example of the effect mode indicating whether or not the last change display of the continuous announcement effect is, for example, a configuration in which the remaining number of changes in the continuous notice effect is displayed by counting down may be used. In addition, the last variation display may be configured to display a display indicating the end (for example, the character “End”), or may be configured to continuously play the same music during the continuous preview production, and to provide the continuous preview production. The music may be stopped at the timing when the last variable display is finished. Further, during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the reach state does not occur in the third symbol display device 81 in the variable display other than the last variable display. That is, during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the reach state may be displayed to indicate that the display is the last change display of the continuous announcement effect.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when the game ball passes through the normal entrance 67, by a lighting state, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a game ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" are alternately lit as the second symbol. A variable display is performed. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 turns on the electric accessory 64 a attached to the first entrance 64 for a predetermined time. The operation state is set (opened), and as a result, the first ball entrance 64 is configured to easily enter a game ball. The number of times the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of the held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also illuminated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. You. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, and also the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of game balls passing through the normal entrance 67 is three or less, or five or more. (For example, eight times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a game ball can enter is arranged. When a game ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a 16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until ten game balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening / closing frontward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where a game ball cannot win or hardly wins. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, and temporarily forms an open state in which the game ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to alternately repeat the state with the closed state.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on on the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the game ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special gaming state. It may be formed as.

  At the lower left and right corners of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is provided with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (fire launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) non-openably connect the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out game balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). Have. The game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of game balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c are stored. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a big hit determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1. However, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning prize is one of the determination values specified in the first random number table 202a. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9B) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the big hit types are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is the big hit type. Is defined in association with. Specifically, the jackpot A is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 49” (see 202b1 in FIG. 9B). The jackpot B is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 99” (see 202b2 in FIG. 9B). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 9C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 9C). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 9C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the normal symbol is referred to by referring to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the game ball passing through the normal entrance 67 and the second random number table 202c. Is determined.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is specified for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting an outage type of stop in a special symbol, A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 29). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance port. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a game ball is provided. The value of the second hit random counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the right or left normal entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). The configuration is returned to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  In addition, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 29).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the game ball has won the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number which is a big hit of the special symbol is set by a first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a large jackpot than the low probability (a special symbol). And the number of large random numbers included in each of them are set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers which are big hits different, the probability of big hits is changed between a low probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a winning in each game state is set in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, when the special symbol is in the probable change state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0 to 9” in the special symbol lottery, and “0 to 9” is determined. 9 ", it is determined to be a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 of "0 to 399", the judgment value of the big hit is 10 of "0 to 9". Is 1/40 (10/400). When the special symbol is in the low probability state, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained is “0”. If the value is “0”, it is determined to be a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 of "0 to 399", the judgment value of the big hit is only one of "0". The probability of a jackpot is 1/400.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random number value of the large jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability are calculated. Therefore, a random number value for each jackpot is set so as not to be a duplicate value. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value of the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). This makes it difficult to predict the random number value that will be a special symbol jackpot, thereby suppressing fraud.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is displayed at the timing when the game ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first one The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the value corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 9B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 49” is “big hit A” (FIG. 9). (Refer to 202b1 of (b)). When the value is “50 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B” (see 202b2 in FIG. 9C). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that two types of hits (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. .

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99), and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., in a range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than before and after the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once every timer interrupt processing), and at the timing when the game ball wins the first entrance 64, the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high-probability cases and a special symbol for low-probability cases. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In this table, the "reach out of front and rear" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "reach other than front and rear out" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select "reach out of front and rear" and "reach other than front and rear out". In the low probability state, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the game ball to enter the first entrance 64. The time table is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, since a lot of reach displays with a long production time can be performed, the time for entering the game balls into the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It is easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach out of order” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 29) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. As described above, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10) storing a random number value that determines one symbol fluctuation time from the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (random number value) is stored in the main control device 110 as described above. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 10A, the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10B) and an out-of-place (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 10C). ) And a deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 10D) are at least set.

  First, with reference to FIG. 10B, a description will be given of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the selected variation pattern is specified when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are specified. Each variation pattern is associated with each of the values of the variation type counter CS1 in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

  Specifically, as a judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a range of “0 to 50” is associated with a fluctuation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and a range of “51 to 179” is various super reach. A variation pattern of (60 seconds) is associated, and a variation pattern of various special reach (90 seconds) is associated with a range of “180 to 198”. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a fluctuation pattern in which a special symbol lottery result is a big hit. It is selected from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The outlier (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of order in the special symbol low probability state. . If the special symbol lottery result is out of order, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown) as described above. It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete out is set. (Reach out of front and back, reach other than front and back out).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is completely off, one of a short deviation (7 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively short and a long deviation (10 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long is set. "0-98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the short deviation (7 seconds) and "99-198" for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  For the outreach, various normal reach (30 seconds) are out of the range of the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 149” and various super reachs are out of the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), but various special reach (90 seconds) are set in “198”.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal gaming state, and obtains the fluctuation obtained from the out-of-office (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 10D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the out-of-place (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the special symbol variation state. In the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 that is set is different from the variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probable change game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by a stop type selection table (not shown), complete departure is determined. , "90-99", the out-of-reach (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back) is determined.

  As described above, when the game state is the certain-variable game state than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when the game is off is set to be lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming longer at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is prolonged in the probable game state in which the big hit is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (through gate) on either the left or right side. It is acquired at the time of being performed, and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that is a hit for the ordinary symbol is set by a second random number table 202c (see FIG. 9C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. Is equal to the winning random number set by the second winning random number table, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, the second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period during which the symbol is in a normal state) and for a high probability (a normal symbol is more likely to be hit) than the low probability. ), And the number of jackpot random numbers contained therein is set differently. As described above, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 9C, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers that can hit the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28” (FIG. 9C ) 202c1)). These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 24 out of a total of 240 random numbers, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the normal symbol, when the game ball passes the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol “○” is illuminated and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for "0.2 seconds × 1 time" when the ordinary symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be set to “0.5 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpot of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204” (see 202c2 in FIG. 9C). These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random numbers, and thus the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, when the game ball passes the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short, from "30 seconds to 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and the first entrance 64 is opened. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, a state in which a game ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times” when a normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 29).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 11, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register at the time of the power shutdown (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 29), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 28). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, and a probable change flag. 203e and at least a time reduction counter 203f.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3, respectively.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the gaming ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Of the vacant areas from the first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, as soon as the game ball wins (starts winning) in the first ball opening 64 and the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained in accordance with the starting winning, the original special symbol jackpot is obtained. Apart from the lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this manner, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is determined based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning. The prediction is described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to a success / failure, a stop type, a variation pattern, and the like.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts a winning / failure, a stop type, and a variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. 223a. If the announcement lottery is not prohibited, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the various information notified by the winning information command.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes the left or right normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to first holding area). Of the vacant areas in the (fourth area), the areas are stored in ascending order of the area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a game ball enters the first entrance 64 and the reserved ball number in the variable display increases, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases to a maximum value of 4. One is added (see S404 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 22).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 22 and S405 in FIG. 24). The reserved ball count command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to display the variable display reserved ball retained in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113, is changed to the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d indicates the number of waiting balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passing of the game ball at the ordinary entrance 67. The counter counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a game ball passes the ordinary entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S604 of FIG. 26). On the other hand, the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S505 in FIG. 25).

  If the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display is held in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the game ball passes through the left or right normal entrance 67, the second random number The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the left or right normal entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. No (S603: No in FIG. 26).

  The probable change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change state of a special symbol (a high probability state of a special symbol). This indicates that the symbol is in a probable change state, and if the value of the probable change flag 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The probability change flag 203e is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON at the end of the special symbol jackpot A (see S1014 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, it is turned off when setting the start of the big hit (see S213 in FIG. 22).

  When the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 23) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol change start process, the probable change flag 203e is referred to, and if the state is on, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for high probability, while the state of the probable change flag 203e is set. Is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 23).

  The time reduction counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to zero, and the main controller 110 performs a lottery of a special symbol, and every time a big hit B is reached, the value is set to 100 at the end of the big hit B. (See S1013 in FIG. 30). In addition, regardless of the jackpot type, if a jackpot has been won by a special symbol lottery, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the jackpot.

  In the case where a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time reduction counter 203f and the state of the probability change flag 203e are referred to, and the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, or the state of the probability change flag 203e is turned on. If it is, it is determined that the symbol is normally during the working hours. In this case, the lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed based on the second random number table for high probability (see S509 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is 0 and the state of the probability change flag 203e is off, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state, and based on the second random number table for low probability, A normal symbol lottery is performed (see S510 in FIG. 25).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of a specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64a is connected to the front side. Send a signal.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the game ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the game ball. is there. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the emission of the game ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and a game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). This controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changes the super reach time. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the details of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 12A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 12A, the ROM 222 is provided with at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and a notice selection table 222b.

  The variation pattern table 222a is used for specifying a detailed display mode of the variation effect based on the rough display mode (variation time) of the variation effect selected by the main controller 110 with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202d. Can be More specifically, when a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display mode selected by main controller 110 is received, advance effect setting processing, which is one of the fluctuation display setting processing (see FIG. 36), is performed. In (see FIG. 37), one variation pattern (detailed display mode of the variation effect) is determined (specified) from among the variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table 222a (see S4603 and S4605 in FIG. 37). In the fluctuation pattern defined in the fluctuation pattern table 222a, information including the presence or absence of a notice effect and the type of the notice effect is specified.

  The notice selection table 222b is a data table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice effect. Details of the notice selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the notice selection table 222b.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the preview selection table 222b is a data table that defines a range of random numbers (values of the production lottery counter 223f) in which each of the preview effects A to C is determined for each variation type. When determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223f belongs to any of the range of the random number value (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) associated with each announcement effect. The execution of the continuous announcement effect of the effect type associated with the range is determined. On the other hand, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223f does not belong to any of the random number ranges defined in the notice selection table 222b, it is determined not to execute the continuous notice effect.

  The notice selection table 222b defines six types of fluctuations: special reach, super reach, normal reach, special reach out, super-reach out, and normal reach out. Other types of fluctuations (long and short) are not specified and therefore are not subject to the execution of the continuous announcement effect. By restricting the subject in which the continuous announcement effect can be executed to the variation type in which the reach state occurs, it is guaranteed that at least the reach state will be developed when the continuous announcement effect is started. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is per special reach, “announcement effect A” is associated with a range of ten random values (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) of “0 to 9”. The "announcement effect B" is defined in association with the range of 35 random values (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "10 to 44", and the fifteen random values of "45 to 59" are specified. The “announcement effect C” is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223f (see 222b1 in FIG. 13). Since the effect lottery counter 223f is updated in the range of 100 values of “0 to 99”, when the fluctuation type is per special reach, the ratio of “announcement effect A” to be determined is 10% (10/10). 100), the ratio at which the “announcement effect B” is determined is 35% (35/100), and the ratio at which the “announcement effect C” is determined is 15% (15/100). In addition, the rate at which the continuous announcement effect is not determined is 40% (40/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is the super reach, the “announcement effect A” corresponds to a range of ten random values (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) of “0 to 9”. The "announcement effect B" is defined in association with a range of 30 random numbers (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "10 to 39", and the 10 random values of "40 to 49" are specified. “Notice effect C” is defined in association with the range of the random number value (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) (see 222b2 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is per super reach, the ratio at which “announcement effect A” is determined is 10% (10/100), and the ratio at which “announcement effect B” is determined is 30% (30/100). ), And the ratio at which the “announcement effect C” is determined is 10% (10/100). In addition, the rate at which the continuous announcement effect is not determined is 50% (50/100). That is, the rate at which the continuous announcement effect is determined is lower than in the case of the special reach. Further, when the continuous announcement effect is executed, the ratio at which the announcement effect A is determined is higher than the special reach, and the ratio at which the announcement effect C is determined is low.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is the normal reach, the “announcement effect A” is associated with a range of ten random numbers (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) of “0 to 9”. The "announcement effect B" is defined in association with the range of 15 random numbers (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "10 to 24", and the five random values of "25 to 29" are specified. “Notification effect C” is defined in association with the range of the numerical value (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) (see 222b3 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is per normal reach, the ratio at which “announcement effect A” is determined is 10% (10/100), and the ratio at which “announcement effect B” is determined is 15% (15/100). The ratio at which the “announcement effect C” is determined is 5% (5/100). In addition, the rate at which the continuous announcement effect is not determined is 70% (70/100). That is, the rate at which the continuous announcement effect is determined is lower than in the case of special reach or super reach. In addition, when the continuous announcement effect is executed, the ratio at which the announcement effect A is determined is higher than the special reach and the super reach, and the ratio at which the announcement effect C is determined is low.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is out of the special reach, the “announcement effect A” corresponds to the range of ten random values (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) of “0 to 9”. "Announcement effect B" is defined in association with a range of eight random values (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "10 to 17", and two of "18, 19" are defined. “Notice effect C” is defined in association with the range of the random number value (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) (see 222b4 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is out of the special reach, the ratio at which “announcement effect A” is determined is 10% (10/100), and the ratio at which “announcement effect B” is determined is 8% (8/100). ), And the ratio at which the “announcement effect C” is determined is 2% (2/100). In addition, the ratio at which the continuous announcement effect is not determined is 80% (80/100). That is, the rate at which the continuous announcement effect is determined is lower than in the special reach, the super reach, and the normal reach. Further, in the case where the continuous announcement effects are executed, the ratio at which the announcement effects A are determined is higher than the special reach, the super reach, and the normal reach, while the ratio at which the announcement effects B and C are determined is low. Become.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is out of the super reach, the “announcement effect A” corresponds to the range of nine random values (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) of “0 to 8”. In addition, the "announcement effect B" is defined in association with one random value (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) "9" (see 222b5 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is out of the super reach, the ratio at which “announcement effect A” is determined is 9% (9/100), and the ratio at which “announcement effect B” is determined is 1% (1/100). ), There is no possibility that the “announcement effect C” is determined. The rate at which the continuous announcement effect is not determined is 90% (90/100). That is, the rate at which the continuous announcement effect is determined is lower than in the special reach, the super reach, the normal reach, and the special reach out. Also, in the case where the continuous announcement effect is executed, the announcement effect B is determined while the ratio at which the announcement effect A is determined is higher than the special reach, the super reach, the normal reach, and the special reach departure. The ratio is lower. Also, there is no possibility that the announcement effect C is determined.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is out of the normal reach, the “announcement effect A” is associated with the range of the five random numbers “0 to 4” (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f). (See 222b6 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is out of the special reach, the ratio at which the “announcement effect A” is determined is 5% (5/100), but there is no possibility that the announcement effects B and C are determined. The ratio at which the continuous announcement effect is not determined is 95% (95/100). That is, the rate at which the continuous announcement effect is determined is lower than that of the other variation types that are the determination targets of the execution of the continuous announcement effect. In addition, when the continuous announcement effect is executed, the possibility that the announcement effects B and C are determined becomes zero while the ratio at which the announcement effect A is determined is higher than other variation types.

  As described above, the first embodiment is configured so that the rate of determining the continuous announcement effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss. In addition, it is configured such that a variation type having a high expectation (long variation time) has a higher rate of determining a continuous announcement effect than a variation type having a low expectation (short variation time). This makes it possible to improve the player's expectation of the jackpot at the time when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is started.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the rate at which the notice effect A is determined is lower in the variation type having the higher degree of expectation than the change type having the lower degree of expectation, Is configured to be higher. For this reason, when the notice effect C is started, the player can be strongly expected to be a big hit, while when the notice effect A is started, the last fluctuation of the continuous notice effect is performed. You can watch the production with a sense of tension until the display. Therefore, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the type of the notice effect.

  In addition, since the notice effect B is configured not to be selected (determined) when the normal reach is out of reach, at the time when the notice effect B is started, the notice effect B develops into a super-reach or more (super reach out, special reach out) or a jackpot. Is determined. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Furthermore, since the announcement effect C is not selected (determined) when the normal reach and the super reach are out, it is determined that the advance effect C will be developed into a special reach or a jackpot at the time when the advance effect C is started. Therefore, when the notice effect C is started, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of expectation of the big hit.

  Next, details of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12B is a block diagram showing the prescribed contents of the RAM 223.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a change The time counter 223e, the effect lottery counter 223f, the game state storage area 223g, the notice effect inhibition flag 223h, the notice number counter 223i, the notice inhibition release flag 223j, the notice type flag 223k, and the other memory area 223z. At least it is provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 detects a start winning, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the starting winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a lottery of a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is performed. The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) notified by the prize information command, as the prize information, and divides the prize information into the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), the extracted winning information is arranged in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). Is stored. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area. In other words, the reserved first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a are the counters stored in the reserved first to fourth areas in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the main controller 110, respectively. Data corresponding to the lottery result based on the value is stored.

  In addition, when various information based on a new start winning is notified by the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the various information. That is, based on the notified various information and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance effect is to be executed and the effect type of the continuous advance effect by referring to the above-mentioned advance selection table 222b. By executing the continuous announcement effect, it is possible to continuously give a sense of expectation to the jackpot over a plurality of variable displays, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Further, as described above, in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, an announcement lottery prohibition state is set in which the determination of whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement effect is prohibited. Then, when the preview lottery prohibition state ends, based on the information stored in all the areas of the winning information storage area 223a, it is determined whether or not the continuous preview effect can be executed. When the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, a determination is also made as to up to which reserved ball the continuous announcement effect is to be continued. A method of determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, which is executed based on the end of the announcement lottery prohibition state, will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a part of the control processing executed by referring to the information of each area of the winning information storage area 223a when the preliminary lottery prohibition state is ended (released). As shown in the dashed line of the horizontally long rectangular shape in FIG. 14, each area of the winning information storage area 223a is configured to be able to store one byte (8 bits) of data. As shown in FIG. 14, a change type is associated with each bit of the 1-byte data, and an ON bit indicates the change type of the winning information stored in the area. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, in order from the upper bits, “per special reach”, “per super reach”, “per normal reach”, “special reach deviated”, “super deviated”, “normal deviated” "," Long-off ", and" short-off "are associated with each other. In the example shown in FIG. 14, the second bit of the reserved first area is 1 (on), and the other bits are off, so that “out of length” associated with the second bit is the reserved first area. The lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data stored in the area. Similarly, in the second reserved area of the prize information storage area 223a, the fifth bit associated with “missing special reach” is set to 1 (ON), so that the lottery indicated by the data of the second reserved area is set. The result (variation type) is “special reach out of reach”. Similarly, the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data in the reserved second area is “short”, and the lottery result (variation type) represented by the data in the reserved third area is “super reach”. Since the data of the execution area is not used in the present control, it is omitted in the drawing.

  When the preliminary lottery prohibition state is released, as shown in FIG. 14, the logical sum of the upper 6 bits of each reserved area excluding the reserved first area among the reserved areas is calculated. The logical sum is a logic that is true (1) if at least one of a plurality of data is true (1) and false (0) if all of the plurality of data is false (0). It is an operation. In the example of FIG. 14, data “010100” is generated (calculated) as the logical sum of the upper 6 bits. The reason why the reserved first area is excluded is that the continuous announcement effect in the first embodiment is configured to be executed over at least two variable displays. In other words, if the reserved first area is used as a target for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, a continuous announcement effect may be set only for one variable display based on the data of the retained first area. This is to prevent (suppress) this.

  In the first embodiment, based on the generated OR data, of the data stored in each of the holding areas of the prize information storage area 223a, the highest degree of expectation (priority for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect). Identify the data corresponding to the holding ball with a high score. More specifically, the logical sum data indicates that the data corresponds to the reserved ball having a higher degree of expectation as it goes to the higher-order bit. Therefore, is there any ON (1) bit in the logical sum data? Whether the bit is ON or not is determined from the upper bit side, and when an ON bit is detected, execution of a continuous announcement effect is performed based on the announcement selection table 222b and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f based on the variation type corresponding to the bit. A lottery is executed. When it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, a search is made for a reserved area in which the bit corresponding to the same degree of expectation (variation type) as the bit of ON (1) of the OR data is ON (1). Then, a continuous announcement effect that continues to the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved area in which the same bit as the logical sum data is on is set.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the preview lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum data is generated based on the data of all the reserved areas of the winning information storage area 223a, and the logical sum data is generated. It is configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed based on this. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 as compared with the case where it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect after checking the details of the data of all the reserved areas. it can. More specifically, for example, in a case where all the reserved balls are out of length or out of short (that is, a lottery result that is not a target of determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect), in the first embodiment, a logic Since all the bits of the sum data become 0, the processing can be terminated at that point. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the method of determining each bit of all the reserved areas one by one. Further, for example, even when there are a plurality of pending balls for which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, if the determination is made based on the logical sum data, only the most significant bit in which 1 data is set is determined. Thus, it is possible to easily specify the fluctuation type having the highest expectation (the priority of determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect) in the hold. Therefore, it is not necessary to determine each bit of all the reserved areas and to perform a process of identifying a variation type having the highest expectation among a plurality of variation types to be determined as to whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

  The special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. The counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main control device 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S4208 in FIG. 33). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball count symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4202 in FIG. 33), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S4502 in FIG. 36). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 (see S4102 in FIG. 32). Sent to controller 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4205 in FIG. 33), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4508 in FIG. 36). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command (see S4510 in FIG. 36).

  The fluctuation time counter 223e is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. At the start of the fluctuation display, a fluctuation time (counter value) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation time counter. For example, the fluctuation time counter is updated every time the main processing (see FIG. 32) is executed. Is done. By the fluctuation time counter 223e, the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol executed in the main control device 110 can be accurately grasped on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, the variation time of the special symbol variable display on the first display device 37 and the variation time of the third symbol variable display executed on the third symbol display device 81 can be matched.

  The production lottery counter 223f is a counter used for the lottery of the production mode, such as determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement production (lottery). This production lottery counter 223f. The value is updated in the range of “0 to 99”. When a lottery is performed for the continuous announcement effect, the continuous announcement effect is determined by referring to the announcement type corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223f from the announcement selection table 222b.

  The game state storage area 223g is a storage area for storing data according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. The gaming state storage area 223g is updated each time a state command output from the main control device 110 is output each time the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed (see S4210 in FIG. 33). Note that the game state storage area 223g is formed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower two bits. More specifically, for example, it indicates whether or not the least significant bit is in the time saving state of a normal symbol, and whether the second least significant bit is in a probable change state of a special symbol. The MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 can grasp the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 on the audio ramp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the gaming status storage area 223g.

  The advance notice prohibition flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set. If the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is turned on, it means that the advance notice lottery is prohibited. On the other hand, if the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is off, it means that the notice lottery is not prohibited. While the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is on, the determination (lottery) of whether or not the continuous notice effect is executable is prohibited. This announcement effect prohibition flag 223h is set to ON when the determination of the execution of the continuous announcement effect (winning lottery) is won (see S4311 in FIG. 34 and S4415 in FIG. 35). In addition, this notice effect prohibition flag 223h is set to OFF when the normal display (ie, without the notice effect) stops changing the display after the end of the continuous notice effect (S4402 in FIG. 35). reference).

  The notice number counter 223i is a counter for counting the number of remaining variable displays in the continuous notice effect. When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, a value corresponding to the number of continuous announcement effects to be executed is set in the announcement number counter 223i (see S4310 in FIG. 34 and S4414 in FIG. 35). As long as the value of the notice number counter 223i is 1 or more, the value is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display starts (see S4604 in FIG. 37).

  The notice prohibition cancellation flag 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the first variable display is being performed after the continuous notice effect has been completed. That is, it is a flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation display for canceling the notice lottery prohibition state after the fluctuation is being performed. If the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is on, it means that the first variable display is being executed after the continuous advance effect has been completed, and if it is off, the first notice display has been completed after the continuous advance effect has been finished. Is in a state other than the execution of the variable display. This notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to ON at the start of the first variable display after the continuous notice effect has been completed (see S4607 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to OFF while the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released (see S4402 in FIG. 35).

  The notice type flag 223k is a flag indicating the effect type of the continuous notice effect, and is assigned, for example, a 3-bit storage area. The first bit corresponds to the notice effect A, the second bit corresponds to the notice effect B, and the third bit corresponds to the notice effect C, indicating that the notice effect corresponding to the ON (1) bit is set. When all the bits are off (0), it means that the continuous announcement effect is not set.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is formed by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 33) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (variation). Direction) and a continuous announcement effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model having different lottery probabilities of special symbol jackpots and different numbers of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described later in detail, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output until the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where much image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the defective data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different defective data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects a program from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , Reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are transferred to the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set such that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is the first predetermined address.

  Accordingly, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. More specifically, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 38) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 38) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 20) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 40B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a process of drawing the next one frame of image and a process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory generally facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after turning on the power. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Last address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included in place of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. The power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is provided. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image in which a result of a lottery performed in the main controller 110 is displayed by a fluctuation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 38).

  Here, the fluctuation image at power-on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110, which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 proceeds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “○” is provided at a lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and when it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 16 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped. The image to be displayed is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thereby, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and a ball is detected at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 16 (b) and (c) alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  When the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the main time image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is displayed on the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 17, a description will be given of the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each of the back images. FIG. 17B shows a back surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” and FIG. 17B shows a back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B are prepared in the character ROM 234 as images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scroll-displayed with a proper connection.

  When the change of the back type is determined and the stage is changed to the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area from the position a to the position a ′ of the corresponding back image. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 17A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “sand beach stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making the entirety resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17B, the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” has only a part of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is resident. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. Must use a very large capacity RAM, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a '(or the range from FIG. 17A to FIG. 17B). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 17A and 17B) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the change, the character ROM 234 may be stored on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the image in the partial range is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the images from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b ′ to position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the rear surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 15) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position “b” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b 'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward.

  Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “1” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display 64 or the second symbol 640 has been hit, the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable effect, but the third symbol display device. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not immediately started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the main symbol without numbers “1” to “9” is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Youth" and "Women" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e. Accordingly, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but displays the character in the resident video RAM 235. By reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the present pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. Upon receiving the error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, image data necessary for drawing an image thereafter, from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. Accordingly, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and the readout signal is sent to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image of one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image of one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This area stores transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, a stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective big hits are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be performed in the future. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged scale than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size from the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variation display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined for each address. One or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the elapse of time. Since it is fixed, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is to display either the back A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”), or to be different from the back A or B. Information for specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies a back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the backs A and B as a drawing target, Further, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81). In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time has elapsed, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. In addition, the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the discontinuity of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the head address “0000H” of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer is set in accordance with the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is stored frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning winning. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, the display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on a configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on a result of a lottery performed based on a winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, the resident The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing are specified.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 19). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 19 corresponds).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 19, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to start the transfer at that time is acquired, and the transfer list is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the image data transfer can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , In the main processing (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 38). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 49B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 40B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 40B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 40B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 40 (b) (see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 41 to 45) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 46 to 48) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 49A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 49B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 20) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction with respect to, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 20) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds transfer pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines transfer data information of transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 20) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 40 (b) ), The pointer updating process (see S7205 in FIG. 46) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, (See FIG. 20), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by an image controller to draw one frame of image generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is output for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rear side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes the transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 46). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states of all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 231. Is In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of the other sprite that is to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and transmits the sprite of the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether or not the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 50). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 50). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, useless transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter, referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 51).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information previously developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This updating is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. The process is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 40B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the counter value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum value (in this embodiment, When they reach 399, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning of the entrance 64 (start winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the passing through the through gate accompanying the passing of the game ball at the normal entrance 67. The processing is executed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and, on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated, is provided. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch game balls when the launch of gaming balls is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device is performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is 0. (S204: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 29) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol-reserved-ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the first area in the hold → the execution area, the second area in the hold → the first area in the hold, the third area in the area → the second area in the hold, the fourth area in the area → the third area in the hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S209: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the processing of S211 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S212). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), the probability change flag 203e is reset to off, and the value of the time reduction counter 203f is reset to 0 (S213) to set the start of the jackpot. (S214), the process proceeds to S217. When the start of the special symbol big hit is set by the process of S214, when the big hit control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 29) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes and the opening command is set. Is done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  In the process of S212, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S215). If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S215: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S216), and the process proceeds to S217. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is 0 (S215: No), the process of S216 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S217. In the processing of S217, a stop command indicating a stop of the change of the special symbol is set (S217), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol change start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S208). The special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is an execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the first and second symbols, the lottery of the "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is performed (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform the lottery. This is a process for determining an effect pattern of a variable effect to be performed (a variable effect pattern).

  In the special symbol change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the current state is the special symbol probable change state (whether the random change flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on) (S302). The probable change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol. If the probable change flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol. If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state).

  If it is determined that the special symbol is in the probable change state (the probable change flag 203e is ON) (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, and thus the first random number acquired in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first random number table for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers of “0 to 9” are set as the random numbers of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these wins. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S302 that the special symbol is not in the probable change state (the probable change flag 203e is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state). Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first random number table for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. Only “0” is set as the random number value to be the special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches “0”, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained in the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (S305: Yes), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table, and the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A , Jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that the hit is the big hit A (16R certain variable big hit) (see 202b1 in FIG. 9B) and “50”. If it is in the range of “−99”, it is determined that the hit is a big hit B (16R time-saving big hit) (see 202b2 in FIG. 9B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Note that the relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is specified in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10) as described above. When the process of S307 ends, the process moves to S310.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S305 that the special symbol has been removed (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviated symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front and rear, reach other than back and forth, or completely out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than departure is set, and "98" , 99 ”, the reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the low probability stop type selection table. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete out is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set, and “98” , 99 ”, the reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the specified content of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10) to obtain the normal reach, The variation time of the symbol variation such as super reach is determined. When the processing in S309 ends, the processing moves to S310.

  In the processing of S310 executed after the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310 ). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S901 of the main processing (see FIG. 29). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol changing process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first entrance 64, and when there is a start win. This is a process for executing the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the values indicated by the various random number counters and the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won (starts winning) the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entry (prize) to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered (wins) the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of times of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) is calculated. It is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, there is no winning in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 29) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Are stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the initial area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the initial area.

  Next, on the basis of the various counter values stored in the process of S406, the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol (whether or not a big hit), its stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407).

  When the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (the big hit type in the case of the big hit), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S407, then, the predicted success or failure of the lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S408), and the process ends.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 29) described later. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts a winning / wrong, a stop type, and a fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol change process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is associated with the second symbol change display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time and the like of the electric accessory 64a.

  In the normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the control for opening and closing the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is performed during the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of suspended display of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: S504). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the first area in the hold → the execution area, the second area in the hold → the first area in the hold, the third area in the area → the second area in the hold, the fourth area in the area → the third area in the hold, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is obtained (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the present time is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S508). Specifically, when the value of the time reduction counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability change flag 203e is on, it is determined that the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is in effect. If the probability change flag 203e is off, it is determined that the symbol is in a normal state of a normal symbol (not a time saving state).

  In the processing of S508, when it is determined that the time is in the state of saving the time of the ordinary symbol (S508: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the second random number table for the high probability time are stored. On the basis of the result, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is won is acquired (S509). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 9C).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S508 that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S508: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the second winning random number counter for the low probability time are determined. Based on the random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c1 in FIG. 9C).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S509 or S510 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S511), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S511: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S512). In the processing of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, it is set so that the symbol of “○” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S514. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S511 that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S511: No), the display mode at the time of the removal is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S514.

  In the processing of S514, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S514). If the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S514: Yes), the fluctuation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is determined. Is set to 3 seconds (S515), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S514 that the normal state is the normal state of the ordinary symbol (S514: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), and this process is performed. To end. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability. The symbol lottery frequency increases. Therefore, since the frequency of winning in the normal symbol lottery increases, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 becomes easy to be opened, so that a game ball enters the first entrance 64. It will be in an easy state.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S517). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S515 or S516 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S517, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S517: No), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S517, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S512, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S513, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S518, when the second symbol display updating process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 29) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After finishing, the stopped symbol (normal symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

  Next, when the variation display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol or not. Is determined (S519). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S519: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol (S520), and it is determined that the current symbol is in the time reduction state (S520: Yes), “1 second × 2 times” is set as the opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 (S522), and the process proceeds to S523. . On the other hand, in the process of S520, when it is determined that the normal pattern is in the normal state (not in the time saving state) (S520: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 Is set to “0.2 times × 1 time” (S521), and the process proceeds to S523.

  In the processing of S523, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set to start for the time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 (S523), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 29) is executed next, the electric accessory 64a is opened. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 end. On the other hand, in the process of S519, if it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S519: No), the processes of S520 to S523 are skipped, and the present process ends.

  Next, a through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 21), and it is determined whether or not a game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the passage of the game ball is determined. If there is, this is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspending it.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the game ball through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display is held in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: No), or the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d even if the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: No) If M) is not less than 4 (S603: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal The value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and the process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the initial area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the initial area.

  Next, an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S701). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S814. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S814 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S814 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S914 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S814, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S814). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S815, S816).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S815, S816) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S815, S816) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S815, S816), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S815), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S816). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S804). S807: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the values of the probability change flag 203e and the time reduction counter 203f are read (S811), and a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state indicated by the read values is set (S812). The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 29) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the status command, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the data in the game status storage area 223g of the RAM 223 according to the game status indicated by the status command. As a result, it is possible to make the sound lamp control device 113 grasp an accurate game state immediately after the power is turned on. After the process of S812 is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S813), and the process proceeds to a main process described later. The state command is composed of, for example, 1-byte data, and the gaming state can be notified by data of lower 2 bits. That is, the least significant bit is a bit indicating whether or not it is in the time saving state. If the least significant bit is on, it indicates that the current symbol is in the time saving state of a normal symbol. On the other hand, when the least significant bit is off, it indicates that the current state is the normal state of the ordinary symbol. Also, this is a bit indicating whether or not the data of the lower 2nd bit is in the probable state. If the lower 2nd bit is on, it indicates that the present state is the probable change state of the special symbol. On the other hand, when the lower 2nd bit is off, it indicates that the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol. By determining whether each bit of the state command is on or off, the sound lamp control device 113 can easily identify the game state.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is determined. Send a prize ball command. In addition, a command for the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 22) and the start winning process (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a game ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of gaming balls have won the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric auditors accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric auditors accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric auditors product opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric auditors product 64a is started when the opening / closing control of the electric auditors product 64a is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 25). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display updating process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) ends, the first symbol display device is activated. The variable display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or the process of S513 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 25). Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the processes from S901 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). More specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S908, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 27 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to game state changes performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initialization process (see S801 in FIG. 28). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S901. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). The jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening port 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol big hit is set, it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1001, if a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and the process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the processing of S1001 (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1003, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1003: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol is in a big hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the special winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1004 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or when the game ball is released after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When a number (for example, 10) is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1007, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

  In the process of S1009, if it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1009: Yes), the ending command is set (S1010), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1009, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the start of the ending effect (S1009: No), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011), and it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the ending effect. If this has been done (S1011: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1011 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current big hit is the big hit A (S1012).

  In the process of S1012, when it is determined that the big hit is not the big hit A (that is, the big hit B) (S1012: No), 100 is overwritten on the value of the time reduction counter 203f, so that 100 times of the normal symbol after the big hit ends. It is set so that the time saving period is given (S1013), and the process shifts to S1015. On the other hand, in the process of S1012, if it is determined that the current big hit is the big hit A (S1012: Yes), the certain change flag 203e is turned on so that the special change state of the special symbol is given after the big hit ends. (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1015.

  In the processing of S1013 or the processing of S1015 executed after the processing of S1014, the lottery state of the special symbol after the jackpot has been completed (whether the special symbol is in a probable change state or the special symbol is in a low probability state) is sounded. The status command for notifying the lamp control device 113 is set (S1015), the end of the jackpot is set (S1016), and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 31, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S4116 (see FIG. 32). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 32, when receiving a power-off command from main controller 110 (see S4113: Yes in FIG. 32), sound lamp control device 113 executes a power-off process in S4116. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4116 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  In the processing of S4002, if the power-off processing flag is OFF (S4002: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs. It is started after the execution of the power-off process in S4116 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). It has been started. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S4116 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the flow shifts to S4008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S4116, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or may transmit an error command to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S4116 (see S4115 in FIG. 32). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The game state at the time of power-on indicated by the state command output in the start-up process of the control device 110 (see FIG. 28) is analyzed (S4011), and the game state is stored according to the game state notified by the state command. The data of the area 223g is updated (S4012). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after, for example, the power is completely shut off, and thus the process of step S4008 is performed via the processes of steps S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), the process skips S4009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S4010, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), and The game state at the time of power-on indicated by the state command output in the start-up process (see FIG. 28) is analyzed (S4011), and the game state stored in the game state storage area 223g is determined according to the game state notified by the state command. The data is updated (S4012). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the routine proceeds to main processing.

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is that when the process from S4004 to S4008 is performed via the process in S4006, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004. When the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control unit 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the audio ramp control unit 113. Can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S4101 was executed (S4101). If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. S4102 to S4110 are mainly processes related to display (staging), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4111 and the processing for updating the variable display setting processing in S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the fluctuation effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S4101, (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S4103 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4102). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and thereafter, the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). . The power-on notification processing is to perform notification for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be done. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S4107). In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing, an input of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, and an effect corresponding to a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is set. That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation period of the continuous transformation effect, the process is to display the success notification mode or the failure notification mode.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S4109, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110), and the processing shifts to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S4111, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4111). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, when the command determination processing ends, a variable display setting processing is executed (S4112). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off processing is executed (S4116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4117), and then the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a store clerk of the hall or the like and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4111). The command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S4201). If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4202), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command ( S4203), and returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 36) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4204). When the stop type command is received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4206). Return to processing. The extracted stop type is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 36) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4207). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S4207: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol) Is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4208). In the process of S4208, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S4208, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the game ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or when a special symbol is drawn, so that the starting ball is started. Every time a winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S4208 to the special symbol retaining ball number of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S4208 is performed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S4207, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), then it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from main controller 110 (S4209). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4209: Yes), the data in the gaming status storage area 223g is updated according to the gaming status indicated by the received status command (S4210), and the process returns to the main process.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4209 that no status command has been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4211: Yes), the received winning command is analyzed, and a winning information command process for performing the execution of the continuous announcement effect is executed (S4212). Then, the processing returns to the main processing. Details of the winning information command processing (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4211 that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), then it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S4213). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (S4213: Yes), it is determined whether or not the timing for canceling the advance lottery prohibition state is reached. A stop command process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the lottery result of the reserved ball is executed (S4214). Details of the stop command processing (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S4214 is completed, a stop display of the changing third symbol is set (S4215), and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4213, if the stop command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S4216). ), And return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is an opening command, a display opening command is set to the display control device 114 to instruct the display control device 114 to start a jackpot opening effect. Further, for example, if the other command is an ending command, by setting a display ending command to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 is instructed to start a big hit ending effect.

  By executing the command determination processing, appropriate processing can be executed according to the command output from main controller 110.

  Next, the details of the above-described winning information command processing (S4212) will be described with reference to FIG. The winning information command process (S4212) is a process for analyzing the received winning command and determining the execution of the continuous announcement effect, as described above.

  In the prize information command processing (see FIG. 34), first, the information notified by the received prize information command is stored in the reserved area having the smallest number among the free areas of the reserved first to fourth areas of the prize information storage area 223a. (S4301). Next, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4302), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 2 or more (S4303).

  If it is determined in the processing of S4303 that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is less than 2 (S4303: No), the number of reserved balls (2 or more) required to execute the continuous announcement effect is not reached. This means that this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4303, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 2 or more (S4303: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is turned on (S4303). S4304). In the processing of S4304, when it is determined that the advance notice production prohibition flag 223h is ON (S4304: Yes), the current state is the preliminary announcement lottery prohibition state, and the determination (executable lottery) of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement production is prohibited. Since it is in the state, the processing of S4305 to S4311 for performing the lottery of the continuous announcement effect is skipped, and this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is off (S4304: No), the notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is read (S4305), and the read notice selection table 222b is read. Among them, by comparing the random number value (counter value) defined corresponding to the variation type notified by the current winning information command with the value of the effect lottery counter 223f, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. (S4306). That is, it is determined whether or not any of the random number values defined in association with each of the announcement effects A to C matches the value of the effect lottery counter 223f.

  Next, it is determined whether the determination result by the process of S4306 is a determination result corresponding to the execution of the continuous announcement effect (S4307), and if the determination result corresponds to the non-execution of the continuous announcement effect (S4307: No). Then, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4307, when it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the continuous announcement effect (S4307: Yes), first, the effect type of the current continuous announcement effect specified from the announcement selection table 222b is set. The notice type flag 223k is updated accordingly (S4308). That is, if the present effect type is the notice effect A, the first bit of the notice type flag 223k is set to on (1), and the other bits are set to off (0). If the notice effect B, the notice type flag is set. The second bit of 223k is set to on (1), the other bits are set to off (0), and in the case of the notice effect C, the third bit of the notice type flag 223k is set to on (1), and the other bits are set to off ( Set to 0).

  When the process of S4308 is completed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4309), and the read counter value is set in the notice number counter 223i (S4310). Thus, the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be set over the variable display based on all currently held balls. When the process of S4310 ends, the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is set to ON to set a notice lottery prohibition state (S4311), and the process ends.

  By executing the prize information command processing (see FIG. 34), the variable display based on the held ball held at the time of receiving the current prize information command and the variable display based on the prize information command are executed. The continuous announcement effect that is performed can be set. As described above, the determination ratio of the continuous announcement effect is higher in the case of the jackpot than in the case where the lottery result notified by the winning information command is out. Therefore, when the continuous announcement effect is executed, it is possible to give the player an expectation of the big hit.

  Next, the details of the above-described stop command processing (S4214) will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the stop command processing (S4214) determines whether or not the timing for canceling the preliminary lottery prohibition state, and if it is the timing for releasing the preliminary lottery prohibition state, the stop command processing (S4214) determines the lottery results of all the reserved balls that have been suspended. This is a process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the information.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the stop command processing (see FIG. 35) is executed, it is determined whether or not the advance notice inhibition release flag 223j is on (S4401), and if it is determined that it is off (S4401: No) This means that it is not the cancellation timing of the announcement lottery prohibition state, and thus this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is ON (that is, it is the timing for canceling the advance notice lottery prohibition state) (S4401: Yes), the advance notice prohibition flag 223h is released to cancel the advance notice lottery prohibition state. Is set to off, and the notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to off (S4402). Next, the counter value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4403), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 2 or more (S4404).

  In the process of S4404, if it is determined that the value of the read special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is equal to or less than 1 (S4404: No), it is less than the reserved ball number necessary to execute the continuous announcement effect, This processing ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4404, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 2 or more (S4404: Yes), the reserved balls having the reserved ball number or more necessary for executing the continuous announcement effect are produced. Since it means that it is suspended, each process of S4405 to S4415 for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the lottery result (variation type) of each retained ball is executed.

  More specifically, first, the logical sum (see FIG. 14) of the upper 6 bits of data in each of the reserved areas of the winning information storage area 223a except the reserved first area is calculated (S4405). Then, it is determined whether or not the most significant bit of the calculated OR is 1 (ON) (S4406). If it is ON (S4406: Yes), the variation type of the ON bit (that is, per special reach) is determined. The respective processes of S4409 to S4415 for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect at a corresponding ratio are executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4406, if it is determined that the most significant bit of the OR data is not 1 (that is, it is 0) (S4406: No), then a bit one bit lower than the currently determined bit is determined. It is determined whether it is 1 (ON) (S4407). In the process of S4407, if it is determined that the lower bit of one bit is not 1 (that is, it is 0) (S4407: No), it is determined whether the bit determined this time is the least significant bit in the OR data. It is determined (S4408).

  In the process of S4408, if it is determined that the target bit for this determination is not the least significant bit in the OR data (S4408: No), the process proceeds to S4407, and thereafter, the process of S4407 is performed. In the determination, a bit of 1 (ON) is detected (S4407: Yes), or in the processing of S4408, it is determined that all the bits up to the least significant bit are not 1 (ON) (that is, 0) (S4408). ), The processes of S4407 and S4408 are repeatedly executed.

  In the process of S4407, when a bit of 1 (ON) is detected (S4407: Yes), it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed at a rate corresponding to the variation type associated with the bit of 1 (ON). The processing of each of S4409 to S4415 is performed. On the other hand, in the process of S4408, if it is determined that all the bits up to the least significant bit are not 1 (ON) (that is, 0) (S4408: No), the continuous This means that the lottery result that is the target of the determination as to whether or not the announcement effect is to be executed is not included, and thus this process is terminated as it is.

  In the processing of S4406 or S4407, when a bit of 1 (ON) is detected from the logical sum data (S4406: Yes or S4407: Yes), first, the notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 13). Reading is performed (S4409). Next, based on the variation type associated with the bit detected to be 1 (ON) in the processing of S4406 or S4407 and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f, the read-out notice selection table 222b is referred to. It is determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect (whether the effect lottery counter 223f matches any random number value specified in the advance selection table 222b) (S4410).

  When the process of S4410 ends, the result of the determination in the process of S4410 is a result corresponding to the execution of the continuous announcement effect (the effect lottery counter 223f matches any random number value specified in the announcement selection table 222b). Is determined (S4411), and if the determination result does not correspond to the execution of the continuous announcement effect (S4411: No), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4411, when it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the continuous announcement effect (S4411: Yes), first, according to the effect type of the current continuous announcement effect specified from the announcement selection table 222b. Then, the notice type flag 223k is updated (S4412). That is, if the present effect type is the notice effect A, the first bit of the notice type flag 223k is set to on (1), and the other bits are set to off (0). If the notice effect B, the notice type flag is set. The second bit of 223k is set to on (1), the other bits are set to off (0), and in the case of the notice effect C, the third bit of the notice type flag 223k is set to on (1), and the other bits are set to off ( Set to 0).

  When the process of S4412 is completed, next, the reserved areas in which the bit corresponding to the variation type that has been determined this time is set to 1 (ON) are sequentially searched from the reserved fourth area side ( (S4413), the value corresponding to the searched reserved area is set in the notice number counter 223i (S4414). For example, if the search result is the reserved fourth area, 4 is set to the notice number counter 223i. For example, if the search result is the reserved second area, 2 is set to the notice number counter 223i.

  The search from the reserved fourth area side is performed in order to set a continuous announcement effect over more reserved balls when there are a plurality of reserved areas in which the bit to be retrieved in step S4413 is 1 (ON). is there. Specifically, for example, the determination as to whether or not to execute the present continuous announcement effect is determined based on the lottery result corresponding to the variation type of super-reach departure, and the super-reach departure is made in the reserved fourth area and the reserved second area. Is stored, the super-reach out of the fourth reserved area can be detected first by searching from the reserved fourth area side. Therefore, it is possible to set the execution of the continuous announcement effect over four variable displays. On the other hand, if the search is performed from the first area on hold, the search ends when data out of the super reach of the second area on hold is detected. (The two times of fluctuation display based on the data stored in the reserved first and second areas). Therefore, by performing a search from the reserved fourth area side, it is possible to set a continuous announcement effect over a larger number of variable displays, so that the player's expectation is sustained for a longer period of time. be able to.

  When the processing of S4414 ends, the notice lottery prohibition state is set by turning on the notice production inhibition flag 223h (S4415), and this processing ends.

  By this stop command processing, at the timing when the preliminary lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum data is generated based on the data of all the reserved areas except the first reserved area in the winning information storage area 223a, and the logical sum data is generated. Based on the sum data, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 as compared with the case where it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect after checking the details of the data of all the reserved areas. it can. More specifically, for example, in a case where all the reserved balls are out of length or out of short (that is, a lottery result that is not a target of determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect), in the first embodiment, a logic Since all the bits of the sum data become 0, the processing can be terminated at that point. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the method of determining each bit of all the reserved areas one by one. Further, for example, even when there are a plurality of pending balls for which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, if the determination is made based on the logical sum data, only the most significant bit in which 1 data is set is determined. Thus, it is possible to easily specify the fluctuation type having the highest expectation (the priority of determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect) in the hold. Therefore, each bit of all the reserved areas is determined, and among a plurality of types of fluctuations for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the change having the highest expectation (priority of determining whether the continuous notice effect is executable) is the highest. There is no need to perform processing such as specifying the type. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, in the process of S4413, the search for the reserved area in which the bit corresponding to the variation type that has been determined to be the continuous announcement effect is on is sequentially executed from the reserved fourth area. Although it was configured, it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which the search is performed sequentially from the reserved first area may be adopted. With such a configuration, when there are a plurality of balls of the variation type to be determined as to whether or not execution of the current continuous announcement effect specified based on the logical sum data is present in the suspension, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is performed. It is possible to suppress the execution of the variation display of the variation type having the same expectation degree a plurality of times during the process. That is, for example, when data corresponding to the fluctuation type of super-reach is stored in the reserved second area and the reserved fourth area, when the reserved area is searched from the reserved fourth area side, the reserved fourth area is displayed. The continuous announcement effect is executed until the variable display corresponding to the data of the area. In this case, in one continuous announcement effect, super-reach (variable display with a high degree of expectation) occurs twice (a plurality of times). If the fluctuation display with a high degree of expectation occurs in rapid succession, and the continuous announcement effect is performed during that time, the expectation for the jackpot is further increased, but eventually the game will be out of play. There is a possibility that the motivation of the player for the game is greatly reduced. On the other hand, when the search of the reserved area is performed from the reserved first area side, the number of times that the fluctuation display of the fluctuation type having a high expectation degree is executed in one continuous announcement effect can be minimized. In addition, even if the player misses the game due to the continuous announcement effect, the player's motivation to play the game can be hardly reduced.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (S4112). The variable display setting process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4501). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S4501: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S4507. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S4501: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S4502), and then, in the process of S4203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 33), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired (S4503).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect is set for the fluctuation display to be started based on the current fluctuation pattern command, and if it is set, an announcement effect setting process for setting the announcement effect is executed (S4504). . Details of the notice effect setting process (S4504) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S4504 is completed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation display mode determined in the process of S4504 is generated, and the command is displayed on the display control device. The setting is made for transmission to S114 (S4505). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4506). In the process of S4506, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the processing in S4507.

  In the process of S4507, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S4507). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S4507: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S4507: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S4508). Then, in the process of S4206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 33), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S4509).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, and based on the set stop type, the display control device 114 is sent to the display control device 114. A display stop type command for notification is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4510), and the process ends. The display control device 114 receives the stop type command for display, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, details of the above-described announcement effect setting process (S4504) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This notice effect setting process (S4504) is a process executed in the change display setting process (see FIG. 36). This is a process for determining whether the setting has been set and, if so, setting a notice effect.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in the notice effect setting processing (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the notice number counter 223i is greater than 0 (S4601). (S4601: Yes), it means that the continuous announcement effect is set for the current fluctuation display, so the announcement type flag 223k is read (S4602). Next, the variation pattern accompanying the announcement effect in the mode indicated by the announcement type flag 223k is determined with reference to the variation pattern selection table 222a (S4603), and the value of the announcement number counter 223i is decremented by 1 (S4604). To end.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the value of the notice number counter 223i is 0 (S4601: No), first, the variation pattern in the mode without the notice effect is referred to by referring to the variation pattern selection table 222a. It is determined (S4605), and it is determined whether or not the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is on (S4606). In the processing of S4606, if it is determined that the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is ON (S4606: Yes), it means that it is the start timing of the first variable display after the end of the continuous notice effect, and thus the notice prohibition is prohibited. The release flag 223j is set to ON (S4607), and the process ends. By setting the notice prohibition release flag 223j to ON in the process of S4607, the notice lottery prohibition state is continued during the fluctuation period of the fluctuation display to be started this time (after the end of the continuous notification effect, the first fluctuation display). At the end of the fluctuation, the advance notice lottery prohibition state can be canceled in the stop command processing (see FIG. 35) (see S4402 in FIG. 35). After the end of the continuous preview production, the preview lottery prohibition state is continued until the first variation display, so that the continuous preview production is prevented from being executed again without an interval after the end of the continuous preview production. it can.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 38, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to the hardware configuration. , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” Will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, if the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when performing random access, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the following is executed according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs being transferred are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 38). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power-up initialization processing (see S6002 in FIG. 38) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing ends.

  By executing the boot process (S6001) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effector.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. The remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 39, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. May be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start program of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is transferred. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. The processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  Accordingly, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from among the boot programs is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, and thereby grasps that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. The image controller responds to the transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 49A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 49A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 40 (b)), the simple command such that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 16 is drawn. The determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 40B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 40B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is stored in the third video. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued. When the main control unit 110 receives the change pattern command for display from the main control unit 110 via the sound lamp control unit 113, that is, when the change pattern command for power supply is received, the change image at power-on is displayed immediately during the change effect period, and the simple change You can make a production. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after power-on, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S6005, interruption permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S6006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processing corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 40B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed to display the image on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process has been executed, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is ON, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the sound lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S6305) are determined. 20. The drawing list shown in FIG. 20 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stopped symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination processing, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big hit A to F, small hit, reach out of front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear miss, reach out of front / rear out, or complete out ) Is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 41, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), a variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 42A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in the case where it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table actually occurs in the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having a time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S6502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of the big hits A to F, the small hits, the out of reach, or the completely out of the way) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 40B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Note that the start of the change is always determined at least several seconds in the main control device 110, so that no more than two display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of step S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S6602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player mistakes the pachinko machine 10 for the "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection, if the "special symbol jackpot" is actually set, the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disconnection. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, and thus the player can be pleased.

  Referring back to FIG. 41, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the opening command processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing an opening command process. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Referring back to FIG. 41, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 41, the description will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the ending command processing (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Referring back to FIG. 41, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). . Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, upon detecting that the back image change flag set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S7002. .

  In the task processing, if it is specified that either the back A or B is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S7002 is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6414, when it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), it is next determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If (S6416: Yes), an error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S7102 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6416: No), then a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  In the processing of S6401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S6402 to S6418 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. The extracted and executed variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 42 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 42 (b)) corresponding to the respective commands are executed. A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 42A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No) ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and the like are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, a pointer update process is performed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer updating process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f specifying the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is the End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( In step S7406, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 46, the description is continued. After the pointer updating process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer updating process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of a sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S7206 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or greater than 1 (S7208: No), the display setting process ends and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not yet been performed, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The content is cleared (S7210) by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and a certain time has elapsed since the end of the finalized display effect. Thereafter, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7222), a demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), and the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set the drawing content.

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 40B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process of setting a display data table that defines that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is read from the character ROM 234 from the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7601: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7602 (S7602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and the process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 40 (b)), the command is not used in the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 40 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 40 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 41 to 45) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 46 to 48) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) (see S7501: No in FIG. 49A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so as to be maintained without being overwritten during power-on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated with the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and store them in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7705.

  Also, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the processing of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after setting a transfer instruction of image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7706 (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the processing of S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S7705: No), the processing shifts to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S7710), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the flow shifts to the process of S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal image transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the sub state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, a process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the process is indicated by the display stop type command. When it is determined that the stop type information is the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 of the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, in the transfer data table, the image data of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, and thus, the predetermined data is defined in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the image data transfer can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information The drawing list (see FIG. 20) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type of the storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the rearranged sprites. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored. ) And the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are performed simultaneously and in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 40B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the rendering process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image drawing processing is being performed.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be able to execute a continuous announcement effect in which the announcement effect of the same system is executed over a plurality of continuous variable displays. Basically, when a new starting prize for the first entrance 64 is detected, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the execution is performed over a variable display based on the held balls held at the time when a new starting winning is detected and a variable display based on the new starting winning. In this continuous announcement production, the percentage determined in the case of a jackpot is higher than in the case of a lottery result of a new start winning prize being out of place, so if the continuous announcement production is executed, the player You can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  In the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, an announcement lottery prohibition state in which the lottery of the continuous announcement effect is inhibited is set. This is to prevent (suppress) the continuous announcement effect from being determined redundantly during the execution of the continuous announcement effect. More specifically, even during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, if the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined based on the detection of a new start winning, if the type of the announcement effect is in the middle of the continuous announcement effect, There is a possibility of switching. For example, during the execution of the continuous announcement effect in which the advance announcement effect B is set, a new start winning is detected to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. May be discontinued, and may be switched to the notice effect A from the next change. In other words, by switching from the effect type with relatively high expectation (notification effect B) to the effect type with low expectation (advance effect A), the player may be disappointed. In addition, if a continuous announcement effect of the same effect type is newly determined during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the continuous announcement effect is repeated over the number of times of the number of retained balls held at the start of the continuous announcement effect, and continuously. A notice effect will be performed. This may make it difficult for the player to understand which reserve ball should have a sense of expectation, so that the meaning of the effect may be difficult to understand. In addition, as a method of solving these problems, during the execution of the continuous announcement effect that finally comes off, only when a start winning prize corresponding to a jackpot is detected, the determination of whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement effect is permitted. In addition, a method is also conceivable in which the effect type of the continuous announcement effect determined additionally has an expectation degree equal to or higher than the effect type of the running continuous announcement effect. However, in this case, every time a start winning is detected during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, it is necessary to determine a plurality of conditions and perform a control process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect and the type of the announcement. However, there is a problem that the processing load may increase.

  Therefore, in the first embodiment, after the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is newly performed from the end of the continuous announcement effect to the end of one variation display. It is configured to prohibit judging the availability. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the effect that the effect type is switched during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, or that the continuous announcement effect continues beyond the number of reserved balls at the start of the continuous announcement effect. Can be. Furthermore, at the time of starting winning, it is only necessary to perform a simple control of determining whether or not the preliminary lottery is prohibited, and skipping the process of determining whether or not to execute the continuous preliminary announcement effect if the preliminary lottery is prohibited. The processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the preliminary lottery prohibition state is released, the lottery results of all the reserved balls held at that time are determined, and based on the determination result, the continuous announcement effect is performed. Is determined to be executable. Although the details of the determination method will be described later, by determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect in consideration of the lottery results of all the reserved balls, even though the reserved balls with higher expectations are reserved, It is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous announcement effect from being set based on the reserved ball having a low degree of expectation. Therefore, despite the fact that the continuous announcement effect was set for the holding ball with low expectation, the continuous announcement effect was not set for the holding ball with high expectation, or the high expectation hold during the continuous announcement effect. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the ball is digested and the reserved ball having a low degree of expectation is digested in the last fluctuation display of the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the continuous announcement effect can be suitably executed.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the notice lottery prohibition state is configured to be continued after the end of the continuous notice effect, until one normal (no notice effect is set) variable display ends. With this configuration, at least one normal change display can be performed after the end of the continuous announcement effect and before the start of the next continuous announcement effect. Thus, it is possible to prevent (prevent) the continuous preview effect from being restarted immediately after the end of the continuous preview effect and continuing the continuous preview effect forever. Therefore, during execution of the continuous announcement effect, it is possible to easily understand which of the reserved balls should be expected.

  In the first embodiment, when the notice lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum data is generated based on the data stored in each holding area of the winning information storage area 223a, and based on the logical sum data. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, each time a winning information command is received, logical sum data may be generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 223. With this configuration, it is possible to omit the process of calculating the OR data when the notice lottery prohibition state is released, so that it is possible to determine whether the continuous notice effect can be performed when the notice lottery prohibition state is released. The processing load required for the determination can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the continuous announcement effect is executed over all the reserved balls held at the time of the determination, but is not limited thereto. Not something. For example, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the range of the reserved balls for performing the continuous announcement effect may be further determined according to the lottery result or the like. More specifically, for example, in the case of a continuous announcement effect in which a miss is finally notified, the number of consecutive announcement effects is configured to be three or less, while a continuous notification in which a hit is finally announced. In the case of a notice effect, a configuration may be used in which the number of continuous notice effects is allowed up to four times. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the number of consecutive announcement effects, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the continuous announcement effect over all the reserved balls held at the time of the determination is set, and then the continuous announcement effect ends. Until then, the lottery prohibition state was set. That is, once the number of consecutive announcement effects in the continuous announcement effect is determined, the number of consecutive events is not increased or decreased. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, if a new winning information command is received during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the lottery of the continuous announcement effect may be performed. That is, a lottery (continuous notice extension lottery) for determining whether or not to extend the continuous notice effect until the variable display corresponding to the new winning information may be executed. In this case, the continuous announcement extended lottery may be performed only when the continuous announcement effect that is being executed is a continuous announcement effect that finally informs the user of the coming off. With this configuration, the continuous announcement effect can be executed continuously more times, so that the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, the extension of the continuous announcement effect may be determined only when a new starting prize is won. With this configuration, if the continuous announcement performance exceeds the upper limit of the number of pending balls of 4, in addition to winning the continuous announcement extension lottery for the player, it will be a big hit Can also be understood. Therefore, a game can be played by paying attention to the number of continuous announcement effects during the execution of the continuous announcement effect.

  In the first embodiment, the logical sum of the upper 6 bits of each reserved area is calculated and used to determine the execution of the continuous announcement effect. However, the present invention is not limited to 6 bits. It may be set arbitrarily according to. Further, the lottery probability (determination ratio) of the continuous announcement effect corresponding to each lottery result may be arbitrarily determined.

  In the first embodiment, the continuous announcement effect is configured to be executable only when the number of reserved balls is two or more. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the number of reserved balls is one, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute a notice effect. In this case, the fluctuation display of the third symbol accompanied by the announcement effect is performed in a single shot during the one fluctuation time (that is, the fluctuation time of the first symbol and the fluctuation time of the third symbol are made to coincide). It is preferable to execute the variable display of the third symbol accompanied by the notice effect a plurality of times within one variable time (that is, execute the variable display of the third symbol with the variable time shorter than the variable time of the first symbol a plurality of times). Yes) configuration.

  In the first embodiment, as the continuous announcement effect, three identical third symbols are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and when the three third symbols are stopped and displayed, the third symbol is displayed. Although the announcement effect displayed in a burning mode has been described, the mode of the announcement effect is not limited to this. For example, during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the same effect (or a similar aspect) may be generated at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the fluctuation) in each fluctuation, or a predetermined timing (for example, when the fluctuation is stopped). ) May have the same (or similar) character. In addition, a series of productions with a story (for example, a production in which a jackpot is notified by fighting an enemy and victory, or a production in which a jackpot is reported if the enemy can escape) is set as a continuous announcement production. Also, the configuration may be such that the processing is executed over all the variable displays. Furthermore, when the continuous announcement effect is set, it is not always necessary to execute the announcement effect of the same system in all the variable displays within the set range. For example, when the announcement effect is determined, the announcement effect is determined. May be changed to a mode different from a normal pattern until the end of the change (for example, the color of the reserved symbol is changed or the reserved symbol is changed to a predetermined character) until the end of the change. . With this configuration, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the reserved ball before the start of the variable display based on the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol whose mode has been changed.

  In the first embodiment, when the continuous announcement effect is set, the main symbol with the same numeral displayed in each symbol column is different from the other third symbol (in the form of an aura). Although it was configured to be displayed in the mode, the effect of changing to a different mode may be executed other than during the execution of the continuous announcement effect. Specifically, for example, only when the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, the main symbol 1 is displayed in the same manner as the notice effect, and the main symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 have the changed main symbol. An effect in which the main symbol having the same number as the symbol is not stopped and displayed may be executed. In addition, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols with the same numbers are displayed in the same manner as the notice effect, and the mode is changed when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed. An effect in which the main symbol having the same number as the given main symbol is not stopped and displayed may be executed. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which a transition is made in the same manner as in the case where the notice effect is set up halfway, and an effect (so-called fake effect) that is different from the notice effect is executed midway. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player feel as if the continuous announcement effect has started until the effect mode becomes different from the announcement effect, so that the continuous announcement effect execution lottery is won for a long time. Even if it is not possible, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the continuous announcement performance.

  In the first embodiment, the ratio at which the continuous announcement effect is determined according to the variation type and the ratio of the types of each advance effect are variable, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the variation type, the configuration may be such that the ratio at which the continuous announcement effect is determined according to the jackpot type or the ratio of the types of each announcement effect is variable. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot according to the presence or absence of the continuous announcement effect and the type of the announcement effect, so that the interest in the continuous announcement effect of the player can be more improved. Can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, when the start winning is detected in the state where the announcement lottery is not prohibited (the announcement production inhibition flag 223h is on), and the winning information command is output to the sound lamp control device 113, the announcement is always made. In the selection table 222b, the configuration is such that the execution or non-execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined (lottery) by referring to the range of the random number value (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) corresponding to the current variation type, but is not limited thereto. Not something. For example, when a reserved ball having a higher degree of expectation than the current start winning prize (a result of a lottery that is advantageous to the player) has already been reserved, the continuous announcement effect may not be drawn. If a continuous announcement effect is determined in the state where a reserve ball with a higher degree of expectation than this start winning prize has already been suspended, after a fluctuation display with a high degree of expectation is executed during the continuous announcement effect, In the last variation display of the continuous announcement effect, a situation occurs where a variation display having a relatively low degree of expectation is executed. In other words, there is a possibility that the degree of expectation may be an effect of a depression in the butt. On the other hand, when a reserved ball having a high degree of expectation is already reserved, the lottery itself of the continuous announcement effect is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the degree of expectation from becoming narrow. Therefore, a great expectation can be given to the fluctuation display executed at the end of the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the announcement lottery prohibition state is released when the fluctuation has ended once after the continuous announcement effect has been completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the notice lottery prohibition state is released when the last variable display of the continuous notice effect is completed.

  In the first embodiment, when the start winning is detected in the state in which the preliminary lottery is not prohibited, the determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous preliminary announcement effect is performed without limitation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a jackpot has already been included in the hold, the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect may be avoided. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a large hit in the middle of the continuous announcement effect, and the continuous announcement effect from being interrupted. In addition, for example, when a lottery result of a jackpot is held in the held first area, it may be configured to avoid determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. With this configuration, even if a jackpot already exists in the hold when a new starting prize is detected, a fluctuation accompanied by at least two announcement effects until the jackpot is announced. Display can be performed. In other words, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the variable display accompanied by the announcement effect is executed only once and the big hit is notified. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the continuous announcement effect has been executed to notify the jackpot, and it is possible to suppress the effect from becoming unnatural. In this case, the setting of the continuous announcement effect is reset at the time of the jackpot, and at the timing when the jackpot is completed, whether or not the continuous announcement effect is executable is determined based on the lottery result (variation type) of each held ball being held. The determination may be made.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, every time a start winning is detected, a special symbol lottery result (win / fail, fluctuation pattern, etc.) is pre-read from various counter values (random values) acquired based on the starting winning, The pre-read result is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the execution of the continuous announcement effect based on the prefetch result notified by the winning information command. Further, in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the announcement lottery prohibition state is set to prevent (suppress) the continuous announcement effect from being determined redundantly. . Then, when the preliminary lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum of the data stored in each holding area of the winning information storage area 223a is calculated at the time of the release, and the continuous announcement effect is executed based on the logical sum. The configuration was determined to be feasible. That is, based on the logical sum data, whether or not the reserved ball of the variation type for which the continuous announcement effect is to be determined is included in the reserved ball, and the variation having the highest expectation among the current reserved balls The type is determined. Then, when the variation type that is the target of the determination of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is included, the execution availability of the continuous announcement effect is determined based on the determination ratio (lottery probability) corresponding to the variation type having the highest expectation ( Lottery).

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, points are set according to the variation type, and the total value of points corresponding to one or a plurality of data stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be grasped. . During the notice lottery prohibition state, each time a new winning information command is received, the point total is updated. When the notice lottery prohibition state is released, the points are held based on the total value of the points. The configuration is such that the type of variation included in the sphere is grasped and it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when various counter values are acquired based on the detection of the start winning in the main control device 110, the range of values to which the acquired various counter values belong is determined and determined. The value range is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. That is, the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is configured to determine only the acquired value range without performing prefetching. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the range of various counter values based on the range of the random value (counter value) notified by the random number range command output from the main control device 110 in place of the winning information command. The pre-reading is executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is partially changed. 113, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has This is a point that the control process performed is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 52A, the ROM 202 of the second embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 9A) in that a random number range selection table 202e is added. Is different. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The random number range selection table 202e is a data table referred to for specifying a range of values to which various counter values (random number values) acquired based on the winning start of the first entrance 64 belong. At the time of the start winning, various counter values are compared with the random number range selection table 202e to specify a range of values to which the counter value (random number value) belongs (see S412 in FIG. 55). The value range of the specified counter value (random number value) is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by a random number range command (see S413 in FIG. 55).

  Details of the random number range selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52B is a block diagram showing a configuration of the random number range selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 52 (b), the random number range selection table 202e includes a random number range table 202e1 for specifying the value range of the first random number counter C1, and a value range of the first random number counter C2. It comprises at least a hit type range table 202e2 for specifying, and a fluctuation type range table 202e3 for specifying the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  With reference to FIG. 52 (c), the outline of the definition contents of each table constituting the random number range selection table 202e will be described by taking the hit random number range table 202e1 as an example among the tables constituting the random number range selection table 202e. .

  As shown in FIG. 52C, the hit random number range table 202e1 associates data (range parameter) indicating the range of the random number value (counter value) with the value range of the first random number counter C1. Stipulated. More specifically, the range parameter “00H” is defined in association with the value “0” of the first random number counter C1 (ie, the large random number in the low probability state and the probable change state of the special symbol). The range parameter “01H” is defined in association with the range “1 to 9” of the value of the first random number counter C1 (that is, the big hit random number in the probable change state of the special symbol). A range parameter “02H” is defined in association with the value range “10-49” of C1, and a range parameter “50-99” is defined with respect to the value range “50-99” of the first random number counter C1. 03H ”is defined in association with the range parameter“ 04H ”for the range“ 100 to 149 ”of the value of the first random number counter C1. Thereafter, different range parameter values are defined in association with every 50 random number value ranges.

  With reference to the winning random number range table 202e1, for example, if the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning start is “60”, the range to which the value of the first random number counter C1 belongs is “ Since it is 50 to 99 "," 03H "is specified as the range parameter indicating the range of the current random value. For example, if the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “375”, the range to which the value of the first random number counter C1 belongs is “350 to 399”. "09H" is specified as the range parameter indicating.

  In each range, only a determination value corresponding to the same determination result is defined. That is, in the range corresponding to the range parameter “00H”, only the determination value determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. In the range corresponding to the range parameter “01H”, only a determination value determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol is defined. Further, in the range corresponding to the range parameters “02H” to “09H”, only a determination value determined to be out of range is defined. In this way, by configuring each range with only the same type of determination value, each range and the determination result can be in one-to-one correspondence. That is, judgment values corresponding to a plurality of judgment results are mixed in one range, and even if a range is specified, it is not possible to specify a judgment result using a counter value (random number value) in the range. Can be suppressed. Therefore, based on the range parameter specified and notified with reference to the hit random number range table 202e1, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately execute the pre-reading process.

  Although not shown, the other tables (the hit type range table 202e2 and the change type range table 202e3) constituting the random number range selection table 202e are similarly the first hit type counter C2 or the change type counter CS1. Are defined in association with the value of the range parameter. Further, the plurality of ranges set in each table are all constituted only by the judgment values corresponding to the same judgment result.

  As described above, the range parameter specified with reference to each data table defined in the random number range selection table 202e, such as the hit random number range table 202e1, is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by a random number range command. . The audio ramp control device 113 pre-reads various lottery results (special symbol lottery results, jackpot types, and variation patterns) based on the range of values to which the various counter values (random number values) notified by the random number range command belong. Although details will be described later, the range of various counter values (random number values) that can be notified by the random number range command and the lottery results based on the various counter values are defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in association with each other. A data table is provided. Upon receiving the random number range command, the sound ramp control device 113 prefetches a lottery result for each counter type based on each data table.

  As described above, the range to which the values of the various counter values (random numbers) obtained based on the start winning prize belong is output to the audio lamp control device 113, and the received various counter values ( By performing the prefetching based on the data table that defines the correspondence between the range to which the value of (random number value) belongs and the lottery result, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. That is, when the start winning is detected, the main controller 110 needs to execute a process of prefetching the lottery result by comparing each random number value specified in the various data tables with the currently acquired counter value. Instead, it is only necessary to compare the value range specified in the random number range selection table 202e with the currently acquired counter value. Therefore, the main control device 110 that performs main control related to the game, such as the jackpot lottery and the update of the display mode of the first symbol, performs the main control related to the game without delay by reducing the processing load. can do. Also, instead of outputting the counter value (random value) itself obtained based on the winning start to the sound lamp control device 113, the counter value (random value) is converted to a value range to which the counter value (random value) belongs and the sound lamp control device 113 Therefore, even if a random number range command is illegally acquired from outside, a random number value (the value of the first random number counter C1) which is a big hit is obtained from the illegally acquired random number range command. It can be hard to predict. Therefore, the deterrent effect against fraud can be enhanced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the prefetching process corresponding to various counters based on the range of the notified counter value (random number value). (See FIG. 23). Pre-reading can be executed under conditions closer to the various lotteries executed in FIG. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the prefetch result.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 53A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53A, the ROM 222 of the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 12A) in that a point selection table 222c and a random number table At least a 222d, a dependent type table 222e, a dependent type table 222f, and a release selection table 222g are added.

  The point selection table 222c is a data table that is referred to to specify a point corresponding to the variation type specified by the pre-reading. During the preliminary lottery prohibition state, the point selection table 222c is referred to and the total value of the points is updated each time the fluctuation type is specified by the pre-reading.

  Details of the point selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54A is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the point selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 54A, points are defined in the point selection table 222c in association with each variation type.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), “30 points” is defined in association with the variation type “per special reach” (see 222c1 in FIG. 54 (a)). “5 points” are defined in association with the types “per super reach” and “per normal reach” (see 222c2 and 222c3 in FIG. 54 (a)), and “special reach out”, “super reach” “1 point” is defined in association with “outside” and “outside normal reach” (see 222c4 to 222c6 in FIG. 54A). On the other hand, “0 point” is defined in association with the other fluctuation types (“long out”, “short out”) (see 222c7 in FIG. 54A).

  In the second embodiment, in the preliminary lottery prohibition state, when the variation type is specified by the prefetch based on the random number range command, the point corresponding to the present prefetch result is specified by referring to the point selection table 222c. The specified points are added to a point storage area 223m described later. Thereby, in the preliminary lottery prohibition state, the points corresponding to all the reserved balls can be updated simultaneously with the prefetching.

  Returning to FIG. 53 (a), the description will be continued. The dependent random number table 222d, the dependent type table 222e, and the dependent type table 222f are respectively a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, and a variation type counter output from the main controller 110 by the random number range command. It is a data table that is referred to prefetch the success / failure of the special symbol, the jackpot type, and the variation pattern based on the value range to which each of the CS1 belongs. The configuration of each of these tables will be described with reference to FIG. 54B, taking the random number table 222d as an example.

  FIG. 54 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the random number table 222d. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the hit random number table 222d includes a range (range) of random numbers determined to be a special symbol jackpot for each game state (low probability state and high probability state of a special symbol). Parameters) are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 54B, “00H” is defined in association with the range (range parameter) of the random value determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol (FIG. b) 222d1), "00H, 01H" is defined in association with a range (range parameter) of random numbers determined to be a big hit in the special symbol high probability state (222d2 in FIG. 54B). reference).

  Although not shown, the values of the range parameters corresponding to the first hit type counter C2 or the change type counter CS1 are similarly applied to the other data tables (the hit type table 222e and the slave type table 222f). And the determined jackpot type or variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

  Upon receiving the random number range command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts and extracts range parameters corresponding to the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 notified by the command. The value of each range parameter is compared with the dependent random number table 222d, the dependent type table 222e, and the dependent variation type table 222f, and the special symbol lottery result, the big hit type, and the variation pattern are prefetched. Based on the range of the notified counter value (random number value), it is possible to execute the look-ahead processing corresponding to various counters, so that the main control device 110 executes the processing in the special symbol change start processing (see FIG. 23). It is possible to execute pre-reading under conditions closer to various lotteries. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the prefetch result. When the pre-reading process is completed, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, as in the first embodiment. In the preliminary lottery prohibition state, instead of determining whether or not to execute the continuous preliminary announcement effect, the point according to the variation type identified by the pre-reading is identified by referring to the point selection table, and the data in the point storage area 223m is specified. Perform the process of updating.

  Returning to FIG. 53 (a), the description will be continued. The cancellation selection table 222g is a data table that is referred to when performing a continuous announcement effect lottery when the advance announcement lottery prohibition state is canceled. When the preliminary lottery prohibition state has been released, by comparing the average value of points obtained by dividing the points stored in the point storage area 223m by the number of reserved balls with the release selection table 222g, continuous preliminary announcement is made. It is determined whether or not the effect can be executed.

  Here, the details of the selection table for release 222g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the release selection table 222g. As shown in FIG. 54 (c), the selection table 222g for cancellation includes an effect lottery counter 223f in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined for each range of the average value of the points stored in the point storage area 223m. Are specified.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), when the average value (A) of the points is greater than 5, the value of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the notice effect A is set to “0”. ~ 19 "are associated with each other, and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the notice effect C is defined as" 20 to 49 "as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the notice effect B. Are defined in association with “50 to 59” (see 222g1 in FIG. 54C).

  When the average value (A) of the points is 5 or less and greater than 1, “0 to 4” is associated with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the notice effect A. "5 to 19" is defined in association with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the notice effect B, and "20 to 20" as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the notice effect C. 29 "(see 222g2 in FIG. 54 (c)). When the average value (A) of the points is 1 or less, “0 to 8” is defined in association with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the notice effect A, and the notice effect B "9" is defined in association with the value of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to (see 222g3 in FIG. 54 (c)). With the release selection table 222g, when the preliminary lottery prohibition state is released, it is possible to perform a lottery (determination) on whether or not to execute the continuous preliminary announcement effect at a lottery probability (determination ratio) corresponding to the average value of points.

  Next, a configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 according to the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 12B) in that a point storage area 223m is added. The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The point storage area 223m is a storage area for storing and updating the total value of points corresponding to the change type of each held ball during the notice lottery prohibition state. In the point storage area 223m, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the total value of the values obtained by converting the variation types corresponding to all the retained balls being retained into points is stored (see FIG. 57). See S4713). Each time a point stored in the point storage area 223m receives a random number range command based on a new start winning prize, and executes a prefetch process based on a random number value (counter value) range notified by the command. Then, the point corresponding to the variation type specified by the prefetch is added and updated (see S4705 in FIG. 57). When a new variable display is started during the preliminary lottery prohibition state, the point corresponding to the type of the variable display to be started is subtracted and updated (see S4613 in FIG. 59).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S111) in the second embodiment. The start winning process 2 (S111) is a process executed in place of the start winning process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and is the same as the start winning process (see FIG. 24). This is a process executed in accordance with the prize winning (starting prize).

  In the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, the processes in S401 to S406 are the same as the respective processes in S401 to S406 in the start winning process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. The processing is executed. In the start winning processing 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, when the processing in S406 ends, the random number range selection table 202e (see FIG. 52 (b)) is read out (S411). By comparing the random number range selection table 202e with the acquired various counter values (random number values), the range (range parameter) to which each counter value (random number value) belongs is specified (S412). Next, a random number range command for notifying a value range (range parameter) to which the specified counter value (random number value) belongs is set (S413), and the process ends.

  The random number range command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 29) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the random number range command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts range parameters corresponding to various counter values (random number values) from the random number range command, and stores the random number random number table 222d, the random number type table 222e, The lottery result based on the current winning prize is pre-read by comparing with the fluctuation type table 222f.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the command determination process 2 (S4121) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This command determination process 2 (4121) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. This is a process for determining a command received from main controller 110 and executing a corresponding control.

  Of the command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 56) in the second embodiment, in the processing of S4201 to S4210, S4213, S4215, and S4216, S4201 to S4201 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S4210, S4213, S4215, and S4216 are executed.

  In the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 56) in the second embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4209 that no status command has been received (S4209: No), then whether a random number range command has been received is determined. If it is determined (S4221) that the random number range command has been received (S4221: Yes), the pre-reading is performed based on the range (range parameter) of the values to which the various counter values belong, notified by the random number range command. Is executed (S4222), and this process ends. Details of the random number range command processing (S4222) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4221 that the random number range command processing has not been received (S4221: No), the processing shifts to the processing of S4213. In the process of S4213, when it is determined that the stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4213: Yes), the stop command process 2 is executed instead of the stop command process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35). Then, the process proceeds to S4215. Details of the stop command processing 2 (S4223) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the random number range command processing (S4222) executed when the random number range command is received in the above-described command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 56) will be described. This random number range command process (S4222) is a process for prefetching based on the range parameter notified by the random number range command, as described above.

  In the random number range command processing (see FIG. 57), first, the range parameter for each counter type notified by the random number range command is compared with the dependent random number table 222d, the dependent type table 222e, and the dependent variation type table 222f. (S4701). That is, the range parameter corresponding to the first hit random number counter C1 is the dependent random number table 222d, the range parameter corresponding to the first hit type counter C2 is the dependent type table 222e, and the range parameter corresponding to the variation type counter CS1 is The lottery results are pre-read by comparing them with the slave fluctuation type table 222f. Then, the pre-read result by the processing of S4701 is stored in a free area of the winning information storage area 223a (S4702).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is turned on (S4703). If it is determined that the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is turned on (S4703: Yes), the notice lottery is prohibited, so the points are stored. The processing for updating the points stored in the area 223m is executed. Specifically, the point selection table 222c is read (S4704). Then, the point corresponding to the pre-read result by the processing of S4701 is read from the point selection table 222c, the read point is added to the value stored in the point storage area 223m (S4705), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4703, when it is determined that the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is off (S4703: No), it is then determined whether the number of reserved balls is two or more (S4706). That is, it is determined whether or not the minimum required balls required for the execution of the continuous announcement effect are reserved. In the process of S4706, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 1 or less (S4706: No), it means that the number of the reserved balls required for executing the continuous announcement effect is less than the minimum number of the reserved balls. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4706 that the number of reserved balls is 2 or more (S4706: Yes), it means that the minimum reserved balls required for the execution of the continuous announcement effect are reserved. Therefore, a process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the variation type specified from the range parameter notified by the current random number range command is executed.

  Specifically, first, the notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is read (S4707), and the change type specified by the prefetching this time and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f are compared with the notice selection table 222b. Then, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed (S4708). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result of S4708 is a result corresponding to the execution of the continuous announcement effect (S4709). If the continuous announcement effect is not to be executed (S4709: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4709, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed (S4709: Yes), first, the announcement type flag 223k is updated according to the effect type of the announcement effect specified from the announcement selection table 222b ( S4710). Next, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4711), and the read counter value is set as the value of the notice number counter 223i (S4712). Next, by comparing the data corresponding to the lottery result (variation type) of each reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a with the point selection table 222c, the variation type of each reserved ball is converted to points. (S4713). Then, the total point value is stored in the point storage area 223m (S4714), the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is set to ON (S4715), and the process ends.

  By this random number range command processing (see FIG. 57), it is possible to accurately execute the pre-reading processing based on the range parameter notified by the random number range command.

  Next, the stop command processing 2 (S4223) described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The stop command process 2 (S4223) is a process executed in place of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, as described above.

  Of the stop command processing 2 (S4223) in the second embodiment, in the processing of S4401 to S4404, S4411, S4412, S4414, and S4415, S4401 to S4401 of the stop command processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S4404, S4411, S4412, S4414, and S4415 are executed.

  In the stop command processing 2 (S4223) of the second embodiment, when the processing of S4404 ends, the point stored in the point storage area 223m is read (S4421), and the read point is 0. It is determined (S4422). In the processing of S4422, when it is determined that the read point is 0 (S4422: Yes), the reserved balls to be determined as to whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed are included in the reserved balls that have been retained. Since this means that there is no data, the processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4422 that the read value is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S4422: No), the holding ball corresponding to the variation type to be determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed Indicates that at least one is reserved, first, an average value (A) is calculated by dividing the points read from the point storage area 223m by the number of reserved balls (the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b) ( S4423).

  Next, by comparing the average value (A) calculated in the processing of S4423 with the selection table for cancellation 222g (see FIG. 54 (c)), it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed (S4424). The processing moves to S4411.

  Further, in the stop command process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4412 ends, the holding area storing the data corresponding to the holding ball of the expected degree corresponding to the range of the average value is set. Then, the search is sequentially performed from the reserved fourth area in the winning information storage area 223a (S4425), and the process proceeds to S4414. For example, if the average value (A) is 1 or less, it means that at least one of the special reach, the super reach, and the normal reach is not included in the reserved ball. In order from four areas, a search is made for a reserved area in which data corresponding to a variation type corresponding to a departure with a reach is stored.

  In the stop command processing 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the processing in S4415 ends, the points stored in the point storage area 223m are reset to 0 (S4426), and the processing ends. I do.

  Next, details of the notice effect setting process 2 (S4521) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the announcement effect setting process 2 (S4521). This notice effect setting process 2 (S4521) is a process executed in place of the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and includes the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect is set for the fluctuation display to be started based on the current fluctuation pattern command, and setting the announcement effect if it is set.

  Of the notice effect setting processing 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, the processing of S4601 to S4607 is the same as the notice effect setting processing of S1601 to S4607 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 37). The same processing is performed.

  In the notice effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4604 or S4607 ends, the point selection table 222c is read out (S4611), and the current execution is performed from the read out table. The point corresponding to the variation type of the variation display to be started is specified (S4612). Then, the point specified in the processing of S4612 is updated by subtracting it from the value stored in the point storage area 223m (S4613), and this processing ends. By executing the notice effect setting processing 2 (see FIG. 59), the points stored in the point storage area 223m can always be maintained at the total value of the points of the reserved balls.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, points are set according to the type of change, and the total value of points corresponding to one or a plurality of data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is calculated. It is configured so that it can be grasped. During the notice lottery prohibition state, each time a new winning information command is received, the point total is updated. When the notice lottery prohibition state is released, the points are held based on the total value of the points. The configuration is such that the type of variation included in the sphere is grasped and it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. With this configuration, it is determined from the value of the point whether or not the pending ball corresponding to the variation type to be determined as to whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement effect is on hold or the type of the variation type to be determined as to whether or not the execution is possible. It can be easily determined. Moreover, after the announcement lottery prohibition state is released, the variation type of all the reserved balls is determined one by one, and a determination is made as to whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed according to the determination result. Thus, the processing load can be reduced.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when various counter values are acquired based on the detection of the start winning in the main control device 110, the range of values to which the acquired various counter values belong is determined and determined. The configuration is such that the range parameter corresponding to the value range is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. That is, the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is configured to determine only the acquired value range without performing prefetching. Then, the sound ramp control device 113 determines the range of various counter values based on the range parameter value notified by the random number range command output from the main control device 110, and performs pre-reading on the sound lamp control device 113 side. It is configured to execute. With this configuration, when a start winning is detected, main controller 110 compares each random number value specified in various data tables with the currently acquired counter value, and prefetches a lottery result. There is no need to execute the processing, and it is only necessary to compare the range of values specified in the random number range selection table 202e with the currently acquired counter value, so that the processing load can be reduced. Therefore, in the main control device 110 that performs main control related to the game, such as a jackpot lottery and update of the display mode of the first symbol, it is possible to suppress the processing from becoming heavy, so that the main control related to the game is reliably performed. It can be executed without delay. Also, instead of outputting the counter value (random value) itself obtained based on the winning start to the sound lamp control device 113, the counter value (random value) is converted to a value range to which the counter value (random value) belongs and the sound lamp control device 113 Therefore, even if a random number range command is illegally acquired from outside, a random number value (the value of the first random number counter C1) which is a big hit is obtained from the illegally acquired random number range command. It can be hard to predict. Therefore, the deterrent effect against fraud can be enhanced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the prefetching process corresponding to various counters based on the range of the notified counter value (random number value). (See FIG. 23). Pre-reading can be executed under conditions closer to the various lotteries executed in FIG. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the prefetch result.

  In the second embodiment, various counter values acquired when a new start winning is detected are converted into range parameters, and are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a random number range command. There is no need to convert to range parameters. For example, the same number of conversion parameters as the number of values that can be taken by various counter values (random number values) are prepared so that each value that can be taken by each counter value and the value of the conversion parameter are in one-to-one correspondence. It may be configured to be set. Then, when various counter values are obtained based on the winning start, the various counter values may be converted into conversion parameter values and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 may be provided with various data tables that define the correspondence between the conversion parameters and the lottery results. With this configuration, the lottery results can be pre-read on the audio lamp control device 113 under conditions closer to the various lotteries performed on the main control device 110, so that the pre-reading can be performed more accurately. it can.

  In the second embodiment, a range of values to which the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained based on the start winning prize belong is specified by the random number range selection table 202e. Although the specified range is notified to the sound ramp control device 113 by the random number range command, the type of the counter to be controlled is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined.

  In the second embodiment, the range to which the various counter values obtained based on the start winning prize belong is specified, and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a random number range command. The notification may be configured. For example, as a table to be compared with various counter values at the time of starting winning, a data table in which a random number value and a lottery result are associated with each other is prepared for the counter value, and various counter values are prepared based on the starting winning. May be specified to output the result to the sound lamp control device 113 by a command. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Also, in this case, there is no need to provide a dedicated data table for reference to specify the lottery results of various counter values at the time of starting winning, and the data table used for executing a special symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation is shared. May be used.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the preliminary lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum of the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is calculated at the time of release, and the calculated logical sum data is calculated. Is configured to determine the type of change included in the reserved ball on the basis of. Then, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the determined variation type.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, during the preliminary lottery prohibition state, of the lottery results based on all the reserved balls, the type of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation and the lottery with the highest expectation degree It is configured to be able to store the holding area where the holding ball corresponding to the result is held. The stored information is updated each time a prefetch result based on a new start winning is notified by a winning information command. That is, the type of the lottery result (variation type) based on the new start winning prize is compared with the type of the lottery result having the highest expected degree already stored, and the expected degree indicated by the new lottery result is already determined. If the lottery result having the highest expectation among the stored lottery results is higher than the expectation degree, the type of the lottery result based on the new winning information and the position of the holding area storing the new winning information are overwritten. It has a configuration.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the RAM 223 in the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and that the audio ramp The control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 60A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60A, the RAM 223 according to the third embodiment includes a high expectation degree type flag 223n and a high expectation degree flag 223n in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 12B). The difference is that a position storage area 223p is provided.

  The high expectation degree type flag 223n is a flag indicating the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) having the highest expectation among the lottery results (variation type) corresponding to each held ball. When the notice lottery prohibition state is released, it is determined based on the state of the high expectation degree type flag 223n whether or not the fluctuation type to be determined as to whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is suspended ( See S4432 in FIG. 62). The correspondence between the state of the high expectation type flag 223n and the expectation will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 60B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the state (value) of the high expectation type flag 223n and the expectation. As shown in FIG. 60B, the high expectation degree type flag 223n has a configuration in which five states of 00H to 04H can be set. As shown in FIG. 60 (b), the value “00H” of the high expectation degree type flag 223n corresponds to “variable out” and “short out” which are the fluctuation types with the lowest expectations. "" Corresponds to "normally out of reach", which is the fluctuation type with the second lowest expectation (fourth highest). The value “02H” of the high expectation degree type flag 223n corresponds to “super-reach out” which is the third lowest (third highest) fluctuation type, and “03H” indicates the expectation degree. Corresponds to the second highest (fourth lowest) fluctuation type, “special reach out”.

  The value “04H” of the high expectation degree type flag 223n corresponds to “various hits” (per special reach, per super reach, per normal reach) with the highest expectation. That is, in the third embodiment, when the lottery result is a big hit, the same expectation degree is set regardless of the fluctuation type. This is to suppress a situation in which a continuous announcement effect is interrupted during a continuous announcement effect and the continuous announcement effect is interrupted. In other words, when the variation type of the jackpot is set to give a difference in the degree of expectation, a start winning prize corresponding to the jackpot of the variation type having a low expectation occurs first, and thereafter, the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot of the variation type having a high degree of expectation is corresponded. When a winning start occurs, the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation position storage area 223p to be described later may be updated based on the jackpot of the fluctuation type having a high expectation. In other words, when a plurality of holding balls corresponding to the jackpot are held at the time when the preliminary lottery prohibition state is released, the jackpot holding based on the start winning prize detected later in time is determined as to whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be performed. There is a possibility that it will be the target of the judgment. In this case, if the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the continuous announcement effect is executed up to the display of the jackpot fluctuation based on the start winning prize detected later in time. The announcement effect is set even in the change display of the jackpot based on the addition introduction prize. Therefore, since the big hit occurs after the change display in which the change is started earlier, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand as if a continuous announcement effect was executed to notify the big hit. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the variation type corresponding to the jackpot is configured not to make a difference in the degree of expectation, and a start winning prize corresponding to the jackpot is newly detected in a state where the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot already exists. Also, the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation position storage area 223p described below are configured not to be updated based on the change type corresponding to the new start winning. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which a continuous announcement effect is restarted after the jackpot and a continuous announcement effect is restarted after the jackpot, so that the last fluctuation display of the continuous announcement effect was Can be more clearly understood by the player. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect that is easier to understand.

  This high expectation degree type flag 223n is reset (set) to the initial value "00H" when execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined (see S4326 in FIG. 61 and S4436 in FIG. 62). Each time a prize information command is received (that is, each time a new start prize is detected), the fluctuation type indicated by the prize information command and the fluctuation with the highest expected degree in the hold indicated by the high degree of expectation type flag 223n. If the expected value of the variation type indicated by the prize information command is higher, the value of the high expectation type flag 223n is a value corresponding to the expected degree of the variation type newly notified by the prize information command. (See S4324 in FIG. 61). Then, when the announcement lottery prohibition state is released and the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the continuous announcement effect is performed up to the variable display based on the data of the reserved area indicated by the high expectation degree position storage area 223p. (See S4434 in FIG. 62).

  Here, although illustration is omitted, in the third embodiment, the specified contents of the notice selection table 222b are also changed in accordance with the same expectation degree (“04H”) of all the fluctuation types that will be a big hit. In addition, the variation type that is a big hit is configured to refer to a common determination value regardless of the variation type. That is, for example, in the first embodiment, when the change type based on the new start winning prize is “super reach hit”, the determination value (see 222b2 in FIG. 13) used for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect is determined. In the third embodiment, a configuration is used in which it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed in all the fluctuation types corresponding to the jackpot.

  In the case where the variation type based on the newly detected starting winning is the jackpot variation type, the determination value used for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect is not limited to this. The first embodiment may use a determination value (222b3 in FIG. 13) used for determination in the case of normal reach, or use a range of determination values not specified in the advance notice selection table 222b in the first embodiment. It may be configured. Thereby, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  Returning to FIG. 60A, the description will be continued. The high expectation position storage area 223p is located at the position of the reserved area where the variation type with the highest expectation (that is, the variation type of the expectation indicated by the value of the high expectation type flag 223n) is retained among the reserved balls. This is a storage area for storing corresponding data. Specifically, if the reserved area in which the reserved ball corresponding to the fluctuation type having the highest expected degree is reserved is the reserved first area, “01H” is stored in the high expected degree position storage area 223p, In the case of the reserved second area, “02H” is stored in the high expected degree position storage area 223p, and in the case of the reserved third area, “03H” is stored in the high expected degree position storage area 223p. In the case of the reserved fourth area, “03H” is stored in the high expectation degree position storage area 223p. The high expectation degree position storage area 223p is reset (set) to the initial value “00H” when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined (that is, when the announcement lottery is prohibited) (FIG. 61, and S4436 in FIG. 62). Each time a prize information command is received (that is, each time a new start prize is detected), the fluctuation type indicated by the prize information command and the fluctuation with the highest expected degree in the hold indicated by the high degree of expectation type flag 223n. If the expected degree of the fluctuation type indicated by the winning information command is higher, the value corresponding to the holding area storing the data corresponding to the winning information newly notified by the winning information command is higher. The expected degree position storage area 223p is overwritten (see S4325 in FIG. 61). When the announcement lottery prohibition state is released and the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the continuous announcement effect up to the variable display based on the data of the reserved area indicated by the high expectation degree position storage area 223p is executed. (See S4434 in FIG. 62).

  As described above, in the third embodiment, in the preliminary lottery prohibited state, the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) having the highest expectation among the reserved balls and the lottery result having the highest expectation are stored. The reserved area that is set can be grasped by the value of the high expectation degree type flag 223n and the data stored in the high expectation degree position storage area 223p. Thus, in the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect performed when the advance announcement lottery prohibition state is released, the continuous announcement effect is simply performed at the determination ratio (lottery probability) corresponding to the variation type indicated by the high expectation degree type flag 223n. Is determined, and there is no need to perform complicated control such as discriminating the variation types of all the reserved balls one by one, so that the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Furthermore, the holding area storing the data corresponding to the lottery result (variation type) having the highest expectation can be easily specified based on the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. In addition, a process for specifying the range of the pending ball for executing the continuous announcement effect can be realized by simpler control. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the processing load from when the notice lottery prohibition state is released to when the continuous notice effect is set.

<Regarding the control processing of the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the winning information command processing 3 (S4231) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  The prize information command process 3 (see FIG. 61) is a process executed instead of the prize information command process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and is a prize information command process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. In the same manner as described above, this is a process for analyzing the received winning command and determining whether to execute the continuous announcement effect.

  Of the winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) in the third embodiment, the processing of S4301 to S4311 is the same as the processing of S4301 to S4311 of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing is performed. In the winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) in the third embodiment, if it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is ON (S4304: Yes), the high expectation degree type flag is set. 223n is read (S4321), and the expected degree indicated by the read high expected degree type flag 223n is compared with the expected degree of the fluctuation type indicated by the received winning information command (S4322). Then, it is determined whether or not the expected degree corresponding to the variation type notified by the newly received prize information command is the higher expected degree (S4323), and the newly notified variation type is higher expected degree. (S4323: Yes), the high expectation type flag 223n is updated to a value (see FIG. 60 (b)) corresponding to the expectation of the change type notified by the current winning information command. (S4324).

  After the processing in S4324, the value corresponding to the type of the reserved area (any of the reserved first to fourth areas) storing the data notified by the current winning information command is overwritten in the high expectation degree position storage area 223p. (Storing) (S4325), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4323, when it is determined that the expected degree of the newly notified variation type is equal to or less than the expected degree indicated by the high expected degree type flag 223n (S4323: No), each processing of S4324 and S4325 is performed. The process is skipped and the process ends.

  Further, in the winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) in the third embodiment, after the processing of S4310 is completed (that is, after the continuous announcement effect is set), the high expectation degree type flag 223n and the high expectation The degree position storage area 223p is reset to the initial value (S4326), and the process proceeds to S4311.

  By executing the prize information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61), every time prize information based on a new starting prize is received in the preliminary lottery prohibited state, all prize information including a new reserve ball based on the prize information is received. It is possible to re-determine the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) having the highest expectation among the reserved balls and the stored reserved area. Therefore, when the preliminary lottery prohibition state is released, the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) having the highest expectation among the reserved balls and the stored reserved area are indicated by the high expectation type flag. It can be easily determined based on the value (state) of 223n and the data of the high expectation position storage area 223p. Therefore, the processing load from the release of the preliminary lottery prohibition state to the completion of the setting of the continuous announcement effect can be reduced, so that the continuous announcement effect setting process can be performed more suitably.

  Next, the details of the stop command processing 3 (S4232) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The stop command process 3 (S4232) in the third embodiment is a process that is executed instead of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, and is the stop command process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35). In the same manner as in), it is determined whether or not the advance lottery prohibition state is released, and if it is the release timing of the advance lottery prohibition state, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be performed based on the lottery results of all the reserved balls being held. This is a process for making a determination.

  Of the stop command processing 3 (see FIG. 62) in the third embodiment, in each of steps S4401 to S4404, S4409, S4411, S4412, and S4415, the stop command processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment is performed. The same processes as those of S4401 to S4404, S4409, S4411, S4412, and S4415 are executed. Further, in the stop command processing 3 (see FIG. 62) in the third embodiment, when the processing of S4404 ends, the high expectation degree type flag 223n is read (S4431), and the value of the read high expectation degree type flag 223n (S4431) is read. It is determined whether or not (state) is “00H” (S4432). That is, it is determined whether or not the pending ball that is the target of determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is included in the pending.

  In the process of S4432, if the value of the high expectation degree type flag 223n is “00H” (S4432: Yes), the fluctuation type with the highest expectation degree in the hold is “outside long” or “outside short”, This means that the pending ball that is the target of determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect is not included in the hold, so that the process is terminated without executing the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. On the other hand, in the processing of S4432, when it is determined that the value of the high expectation degree type flag 223n is not “00H” (S4432: No), the data stored in the high expectation degree position storage area 223p is next. 02H ”or more (S4433), and if it is determined to be“ 01H ”(S4433: No), the reserved ball corresponding to the fluctuation type with the highest expectation is stored in the reserved first area. Since this means that the announcement effect cannot be executed over a plurality of variable displays, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4433, when it is determined that the data stored in the high expectation degree position storage area 223p is equal to or more than “02H” (S4433: Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. Since the change type is included in the hold and the change type is held in the second hold area and thereafter, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. Specifically, the notice selection table 222b is read (S4409), and the continuous notice effect is executed based on the read notice selection table 222b and the variation type corresponding to the value (state) of the high expectation degree type flag 223n. A determination is made (lottery) of availability (S4434), and the process proceeds to S4411.

  Further, in the stop command processing 3 (see FIG. 62) in the third embodiment, when the processing of S4412 ends, the value stored in the high expectation degree position storage area 223p is set as the value of the notice number counter 223i (S4435). ), The high expectation degree type flag 223n and the high expectation degree position storage area 223p are both reset to “00H”, which is the initial value (S4436), and the process shifts to S4415.

  By executing the stop command processing 3 (see FIG. 62), when the notice lottery prohibition state is released, the continuous notice effect is executed based on the variation type indicated by the state (value) of the high expectation degree type flag 223n. Acceptability can be easily determined. When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, it is possible to easily specify the range of the reserved area for which the continuous announcement effect is set based on the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. it can. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load from when the notice lottery prohibition state is released to when the setting of the continuous notice effect is completed.

  Next, details of the notice effect setting process 3 (S4531) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The notice effect setting process 3 (S4531) in the third embodiment is a process executed in place of the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. As in the case of FIG. 37), it is a process for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect is set for the fluctuation display to be started based on the current fluctuation pattern command, and setting the announcement effect if it is set.

  Of the notice effect setting processing 3 (see FIG. 63) in the third embodiment, the processing of S4601 to S4607 is the same as the notice effect setting processing of S4601 to S4607 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 37). The same processing is performed.

  In the notice effect setting processing 3 (see FIG. 63) in the third embodiment, when the processing of S4604 or S4607 is completed (that is, in the case of the change start timing during the notice lottery prohibition state), the high It is determined whether the state (value) of the expected degree type flag 223n is “00H” (S4621). If the state (value) is other than “00H” (S4621: No), the data of the high expected degree position storage area 223p is set to 1 Update is performed by subtraction (S4622), and this process ends. As a result, the start of a new fluctuation display is set, and the position (reservation area) where the reservation ball corresponding to the fluctuation type with the highest expectation is stored is set in accordance with the shift of the data of each reservation area. The indicated data (data of the high expectation degree position storage area 223p) can be updated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4621 that the state of the high expectation degree type flag 223n is “00H” (S4621: Yes), the processing of S4622 is skipped, and the present processing is terminated as it is. If the state of the high expectation degree type flag 223n is “00H”, whether or not the prize information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) has been executed at all in the present announcement lottery prohibition state, or whether or not the prize information command processing 3 Since it means that the fluctuation type corresponding to the new winning information has never been determined to have the high expectation degree in the process of S4323 in FIG. 61 (see FIG. 61), the data of the high expectation degree position storage area 223p is stored. Is kept at the initial value "00H".

  By executing the notice effect setting processing 3 (see FIG. 63), the data of the high expectation degree position storage area 223p is stored in actual winning information every time a new variable display is started in the notice lottery prohibited state. It can be updated by linking to the data of the area 223a.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, during the preliminary lottery prohibition state, the type of the lottery result (variation type) having the highest expectation among the lottery results based on all the reserved balls and the type thereof are described. The reserved area in which the reserved ball corresponding to the lottery result with a high expectation is retained is configured to be able to be grasped by the state of the high expectation type flag 223n and the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. I have. Then, when the preliminary lottery prohibition state is released, the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) having the highest expectation among the reserved balls and the stored holding area are changed to the high expectation type. The determination is made based on the value (state) of the flag 223n and the data of the high expectation degree position storage area 223p.

  With this configuration, when the notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, it is possible to easily determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect based on the variation type indicated by the state (value) of the high expectation degree type flag 223n. it can. That is, a simple process is performed compared with the case where the change type of each reserved ball is determined one by one from all the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a, and the change type with the highest expectation is specified. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, so that the processing load on the MPU 221 when the announcement lottery prohibition state is released can be reduced. When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, it is possible to easily specify the range of the reserved area for which the continuous announcement effect is set based on the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. it can. That is, the process of searching for the reserved area storing the data corresponding to the variation type that has been subjected to the determination of whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be performed is omitted, and the data stored in the high expectation degree position storage area 223p is simply deleted. Since the processing can be replaced by a simple process of reading, the processing load when setting the range of the reserved balls to be subjected to the continuous announcement effect can be reduced.

  In the third embodiment, when the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot is notified by the prize information command, and when the notice lottery prohibition state is released, the lottery corresponding to the jackpot is held in the reserved balls held. When the result is suspended, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined based on the same determination value without depending on the variation type corresponding to the jackpot, but the configuration is not limited to this. As in the first embodiment, the rate at which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined according to the type of variation may be made different according to the type of variation.

  In the third embodiment, the continuous processing is performed when the notice lottery prohibition state is released based on two types of information, the value of the high expectation degree type flag 223n and the data stored in the high expectation degree position storage area 223p. Although the execution of the notice effect is determined, the present invention is not limited to this. Only one of them may be provided in the RAM 223, and a determination may be made as to whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed in combination with the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a. With such a configuration, the storage capacity of the RAM 223 can be reduced.

  In the third embodiment, the winning information notified by the winning information command is stored in the free area of the winning information storage area 223a, but the winning information storage area 223a may be deleted. At normal times, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on only the winning information notified by the winning information command. This is because, based on only the data stored in the area 223p, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect when the announcement lottery prohibition state is released. By deleting the winning information storage area 223a, the capacity of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the announcement lottery prohibition state is set to prevent (suppress) the continuous announcement effect from being determined repeatedly. . Then, when the preliminary lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum of the data stored in each holding area of the winning information storage area 223a is calculated at the time of the release, and the continuous announcement effect is executed based on the logical sum. The configuration was determined to be feasible. That is, based on the logical sum data, whether or not the reserved ball of the variation type for which the continuous announcement effect is to be determined is included in the reserved ball, and the variation having the highest expectation among the current reserved balls The type is determined. Then, when the variation type that is the target of the determination of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is included, the execution availability of the continuous announcement effect is determined based on the determination ratio (lottery probability) corresponding to the variation type having the highest expectation ( Lottery).

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the announcement lottery prohibition state is set not only when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, but also when a jackpot is won. Then, even at the end of the big hit, the notice lottery prohibition state is released, and the calculation of the logical sum data and the determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect are performed. With this, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect by taking into account the fluctuation types of all the reserved balls that are reserved at the end of the jackpot, so that the reserved balls with higher expectations are reserved. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous announcement effect from being set based on the reserved ball having a low degree of expectation. Therefore, immediately after the jackpot has ended, despite the fact that the continuous announcement effect has been set for the reserved ball with low expectation, the continuous announcement effect is not set for the reserved ball with high expectation, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a reserved ball having a high degree of expectation is consumed halfway, and a reserved ball having a low degree of expectation is consumed in the last fluctuation display of the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the continuous announcement effect can be suitably executed.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration in that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. It is. Regarding various electrical configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 64, a description will be given of a change over time in a lottery (judgment) state of a continuous announcement effect after winning a jackpot in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, when the jackpot is won and the start timing of the jackpot (start timing of the opening period) comes, the announcement lottery prohibition state is set. Thus, during the jackpot, the determination (lottery) of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect is not executed even if the start winning is detected. In the example of FIG. 64, the case where two start winnings (winning a and winning b) are detected during the jackpot is shown. However, both the case where the winning a is detected and the case where the winning b is detected are notified. Since the lottery prohibition state is set, it is not determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the announcement lottery prohibition state continues even during the jackpot ending period, and when the ending period ends (that is, when the jackpot end timing comes), the announcement lottery prohibition state is released. You. When the preliminary lottery prohibition state is canceled, the content (variation type) of the reserved ball retained during the big hit (winning a and winning b) and the reserved ball already reserved at the time of the start of the big hit is displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. That is, similarly to the case where the preliminary lottery prohibition state in the above-described first embodiment has been released, the logical sum of the data stored in each holding area of the winning information storage area 223a is calculated, and the highest expectation degree is obtained. Specify the variation type. Then, based on the lottery probability (determination ratio) corresponding to the fluctuation type having the high degree of expectation, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect by taking into account the fluctuation types of all the reserved balls that are reserved at the end of the jackpot, so that a reserved ball with a higher degree of expectation can be determined. It is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous announcement effect from being set based on the held ball having a low degree of expectation despite being held. If it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect each time a start winning is detected until the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined in the same manner as in the normal case during the execution of the jackpot, the variation type having a low degree of expectation is determined. There is a possibility that after determining the execution of the continuous announcement effect for the start winning prize, the start winning prize of the fluctuation type with high expectation is detected. In this case, the continuous announcement effect starting from the variation immediately after the jackpot has been completed continues to the variation type with a low degree of expectation, and the variation display with a high degree of expectation is executed immediately after the end of the continuous announcement effect, so that the game There is a possibility that the reliability of the continuous announcement effect of the user may be reduced. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, during the jackpot, the announcement lottery prohibition state is set. Therefore, immediately after the jackpot is over, even if the continuous announcement effect is set to the holding ball having a low degree of expectation. Despite this, the continuous announcement effect is not set for the high expected ball, or the high expected ball is consumed during the continuous announcement effect, and the low expectation is displayed at the end of the continuous announcement effect. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the retaining ball is digested. Therefore, the continuous announcement effect can be suitably executed.

  Although illustration is omitted, if the continuous announcement effect has already been set at the time of the start of the jackpot, the setting of the continuous announcement effect is once cleared when setting the announcement lottery prohibition state. It has a configuration. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the jackpot from ending with the setting of the continuous announcement effect before the start of the jackpot, so more reliably, between the holding ball at the time of the jackpot winning and the jackpot It is possible to suitably determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect after the jackpot, after taking into account all the increased types of fluctuations of the reserved ball.

  In the fourth embodiment, at the time of the start of the jackpot, the continuous announcement effect that has been set before the jackpot is started is cleared. The timing of clearing is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the setting of the continuous announcement effect is cleared based on the detection of the first start winning at the jackpot. With this configuration, for example, when a start winning is not detected during a jackpot, the setting of the continuous announcement effect before the start of the jackpot can be directly used as the setting after the jackpot. In other words, when the preliminary lottery prohibition state is canceled, it is possible to prevent the unnecessary processing of determining whether or not to execute the continuous preliminary announcement effect on the same reserved ball as before the start of the jackpot, thereby preventing occurrence of unnecessary processing. The processing load on the lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the command determination process 4 (S4131) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This command determination process 4 (S4131) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the above-described first embodiment, and is similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. Secondly, this is a process for performing control according to the command received from main controller 110.

  Of the command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, in the processing of S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, and S4216, the command determination processing (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment is respectively performed. The same processes as those of S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, and S4216 are executed.

  In the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the status command has been received in the process of S4209 (S4209: Yes), the gaming status is determined according to the gaming status indicated by the status command. State command processing for updating the data in the storage area 223g is executed (S4231), and this processing ends. Details of this state command processing (S4231) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the winning information command is received in the process of S4211 (S4211: Yes), the winning information command process (S4211) in the first embodiment is performed. Instead of the process shown in FIG. 34), a winning information command process 4 is executed (S4232), and this process ends. The details of the winning information command processing 4 (S4232) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4211 that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), it is next determined whether or not an opening command is included in the commands received from the main control device 110 (S4233). ), If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S4233: Yes), first, the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is set to ON (S4234). Thereby, when the jackpot opening period is started, the announcement lottery prohibition state can be set.

  When the process of S4234 is completed, next, the counter value of the notice number counter 223i is reset to 0, and the notice type flag 223k is reset to the initial value “00H”, thereby resetting the setting of the continuous notice effect. (S4235), an opening command for display is set (S4236), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4233 that the opening command has not been received (S4233: No), the process proceeds to S4213.

  In the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the stop command is received in the process of S4213 (S4213: Yes), the process is replaced with the stop command process (see FIG. 35). Then, a release-time determination process is performed (S4237), and the process proceeds to S4215. The cancellation determination process (S4237) determines whether or not the preliminary lottery prohibition state has been released, and if the preliminary lottery prohibition state has been released, whether or not a continuous preliminary announcement effect can be performed in accordance with the type of change of each reserved ball. This is a process for determining. Details of the release-time determination process (S4237) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, details of the above-described state command processing (S4231) will be described. This state command processing (S4231) is processing for updating data in the game state storage area 223g according to the game state indicated by the state command, as described above.

  In this state command processing (see FIG. 66), first, the data stored in the game state storage area 223g is updated according to the game state indicated by the received state command (S4801). It is determined whether or not the status command is output at the end of the jackpot (S4802). That is, it is determined whether or not the status command is the status command set by the process of S1015 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As described above, in the status command composed of 1-byte data, the lower two bits are data indicating a gaming state. That is, the least significant bit is a bit indicating whether or not the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is present, and the second least significant bit is a bit indicating whether or not the special symbol is in the probable change state. In the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined bit (for example, the most significant bit) other than the lower two bits is on, it indicates that the state command is output at the end of the jackpot, and when it is off, the state command is output. Indicates that this is a status command output at times other than termination. That is, in the process of S1015 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the lower two bits of the status command are set according to the gaming state after the jackpot, and the predetermined bits are set. A state command in which (for example, the most significant bit) is set to ON is generated. Thus, in the process of S4802, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the state command is output at the end of the big hit simply by determining whether a predetermined bit (for example, the most significant bit) is on.

  In the process of S4802, if it is determined that the status command is output at the end of the jackpot (S4802: Yes), it means that it is the jackpot end timing, and the notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to ON (S4803). Then, the above-described release-time determination process is executed (S4804), and this process ends. By setting the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j to ON in the process of S4802, in the release determination process (S4804), the hold ball held at the start of the big hit and the hold newly acquired during the execution of the big hit Based on the variation type of the ball, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the cancellation determination process (the same process as the cancellation of the advance lottery prohibition state after the execution of the continuous announcement effect, and the end of the jackpot) is performed. (See FIG. 68) to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. Accordingly, the description of the control program can be simplified as compared with the case where the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined by a separate process in accordance with the cancellation trigger of the announcement lottery prohibition state. Therefore, the amount of work of the developer at the time of development can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4802, when it is determined that the status command received from the main control device 110 is not the command output at the end of the jackpot (S4802: No), the processes of S4803 and S4804 are skipped and the process is skipped. This processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the above-described winning information command processing 4 (S4232) will be described in detail. The winning information command process 4 (S4232) is a process executed in place of the winning information command process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, as described above.

  Of the winning information command processing 4 (S4232) in the fourth embodiment, the respective processing of S4301 to S4311 are the same as the respective processing of S4301 to S4311 of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. The processing is executed.

  In the winning information command processing 4 (see FIG. 67) in the fourth embodiment, after the processing of S4301 is completed, a hold corresponding to the jackpot before the start winning, which has triggered the output of the current winning information command. It is determined whether or not the ball is already reserved (S4331). More specifically, the data in the execution area of the prize information storage area 223a and the data in each holding area are read out, and at least one of the data corresponds to a variation type corresponding to the jackpot (one of the special reach, the super reach, and the normal reach). ). That is, the logical sum of all the reserved areas other than the reserved area storing the data based on the current winning information command is calculated, and it is determined whether at least one of the upper three bits is on.

  In the processing of S4331, if it is determined that the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot has already been reserved (any of the upper 3 bits of the logical sum is on) (S4331: Yes), the reserve based on the current start winning prize Even if a continuous announcement effect is set up to the ball, the continuous announcement effect will be reset due to a big hit on the way, so the continuous announcement effect will be incomplete (for example, a continuous A preview effect should have been set, but the first change would cause a jackpot). Therefore, in this case, the process is terminated without determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4331, if it is determined that the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot is not reserved (S4331: No), it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the variation type indicated by the current winning information command. Each process of S4302 to S4311 is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, details of the above-described release-time determination processing (S4237, S4804) will be described. The cancellation determination process (S4237, S4804) is a process for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed and the execution range based on the variation type of each reserved ball when the announcement lottery prohibition state is cancelled. . That is, this is a process corresponding to the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the timing at which the preliminary lottery prohibition state can be canceled is only the timing at which the stop command is received. However, in the fourth embodiment, even when the end timing of the jackpot is reached, the preliminary lottery is prohibited. The prohibition state is released. For this reason, the name of the process has been changed to "release-time determination process".

  In the release-time determination process (see FIG. 68) in the fourth embodiment, the processes in S4401 to S4415 are the same as the processes in S4401 to S4415 in the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. In the release-time determination process (see FIG. 68) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S4403 ends, the variation display during execution or the variation display to be executed next notifies the big hit. It is determined whether it is a display (S4441). More specifically, the data of the execution area of the winning information storage area 223a and the data of the first hold area are read, and it is determined which of the areas stores the data corresponding to the type of the big hit variation. In the process of S4441, if it is determined that the data corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation type is stored (S4441: Yes), even if the continuous announcement effect is set, the announcement effect continues over a plurality of fluctuation displays. Before the is executed, a jackpot is hit, meaning that the setting of the continuous announcement effect is reset. Therefore, in this case, the present process is terminated without determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4441, when it is determined that neither the currently-displayed variable display nor the next variable display is a big hit (S4441: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be performed and the execution range. The processing of steps S4404 to S4415 is performed, and the processing ends.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has a configuration in which the announcement lottery prohibition state is set not only when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, but also when a jackpot has been won. Then, even at the end of the big hit, the notice lottery prohibition state is released, and the calculation of the logical sum data and the determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect are performed. With this, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect by taking into account the fluctuation types of all the reserved balls that are reserved at the end of the jackpot, so that the reserved balls with higher expectations are reserved. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous announcement effect from being set based on the reserved ball having a low degree of expectation. Therefore, immediately after the jackpot has ended, despite the fact that the continuous announcement effect has been set for the reserved ball with low expectation, the continuous announcement effect is not set for the reserved ball with high expectation, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a reserved ball having a high degree of expectation is consumed halfway, and a reserved ball having a low degree of expectation is consumed in the last fluctuation display of the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the continuous announcement effect can be suitably executed.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the cancellation determination process (FIG. 68) that is completely the same between the case where the advance lottery prohibition state is canceled after the execution of the continuous announcement effect and the end of the jackpot (FIG. 68). ) Is executed to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the description of the control program as compared with the case where the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined in a separate process in response to the release of the advance announcement lottery prohibition state. it can. Therefore, the amount of work of the developer at the time of development can be reduced.

  In the fourth embodiment, the notice lottery prohibition state is released at the end timing of the jackpot, and the holding ball that has already been held at the start of the jackpot and the holding based on the newly-selected start winning during the jackpot are held. From each variation type of the ball, it was configured to determine whether to execute the continuous announcement effect after the end of the jackpot, but the cancellation timing of the announcement lottery prohibition state and the determination timing of the execution of the continuous announcement effect were It is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a start winning is detected during a jackpot, and when the number of reserved balls reaches a maximum, the preliminary lottery prohibition state is released to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preliminary announcement effect. When the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum, it is impossible that the number of retained balls will increase thereafter (that is, the fluctuation type with the highest expectation does not change until the end of the jackpot), so a continuous announcement effect at the end timing of the jackpot This is because the same result as that of determining whether or not the execution can be obtained can be obtained. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 at the end of the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem such as delaying the timing of starting the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 after the end of the big hit.

  In the fourth embodiment, the same is applied to the case where the notice lottery prohibition state is canceled based on the end of the jackpot and the case where the notice lottery prohibition state is canceled based on the end of the continuous notice effect. Although the release-time determination process (see FIG. 68), which is the process, is configured to be performed, it is not always necessary to perform the same process. Separate processing may be prepared. With this configuration, the processing can be made different at the end of the jackpot and at the end of the continuous announcement effect, so that the execution conditions of the continuous announcement effect can be different. Thereby, for example, it is possible to realize a special control such that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is permitted only after the end of the big hit and only when the win is finally made. Therefore, the game can be played while also paying attention to the cancellation condition of the announcement lottery prohibition state, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

<Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the above-described fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the notice lottery prohibition state is set during the jackpot, and the notice lottery prohibition state is released at the end timing of the jackpot to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, at a predetermined timing during the big hit (at the start of the ending period), the preview lottery prohibition state is canceled to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview effect. Then, in the jackpot ending effect, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation as to whether or not the continuous announcement effect is started after the end of the jackpot. Thereby, when the ending effect of the aspect with a high expectation that the continuous announcement effect is executed is executed, the continuous announcement is started from before the third symbol display device 81 starts to display the variation of the third symbol. It is possible to make the player have a stronger sense of expectation for the effect.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described fourth embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. That is, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 69A, the ROM 222 in the modification of the fourth embodiment is the same as the configuration of the ROM 222 in the above-described fourth embodiment (the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12A)). ) Is different in that an ending selection table 222h is added. The other configuration is the same as that of the above-described fourth embodiment, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  The ending selection table 222h is a data table that is referred to when the jackpot ending period is started to determine an ending effect mode. As described above, in the present modified example, the degree of expectation that the continuous announcement effect is executed after the end of the jackpot is indicated by the mode of the ending effect. In this modification, a normal mode (a mode with a low degree of expectation that the continuous preview effect is executed) ) And an ending effect in a special mode (a mode in which the continuous announcement effect is executed with high expectation) is determined from the ending selection table 222h (see S4910 in FIG. 72).

  The ending selection table 222h will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the ending selection table 222h. As shown in FIG. 70, in the ending effect selection table 222h, the range of the value (random number value) of the effect lottery counter 223f in which the normal ending with a low degree of expectation that the continuous announcement effect is executed is determined, and the continuous announcement effect is displayed. The range of the random value (counter value) for which the announcement suggestion ending with a high degree of expectation to be executed is determined is associated with each of the availability of the continuous announcement effect and the judgment result of the announcement type. Although illustration is omitted, the background color during the ending effect is set to blue in the normal ending, while the background color is set to red in the notice suggestion ending. With such a configuration, the player can easily determine whether the ending is the normal ending or the announcement suggestion ending simply by checking the color of the background. Therefore, at the start of the jackpot ending period, it is possible to make the player play the game expecting that the background will be red.

  As shown in FIG. 70, “0 to 49” is defined in association with “announcement effect A” as a range of the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the normal ending, and corresponds to the advance notice ending. “50 to 99” is defined in association with the range of the random number value (counter value) (see 222 h 1 in FIG. 70). For this reason, when “announcement effect A” is determined in the lottery of the execution of the continuous announcement effect executed during the jackpot, the announcement suggestion ending is made as a jackpot ending effect at a rate of 50% (50/100). Is set.

  In addition, for “announcement effect B”, “0 to 24” is defined in association with the range of the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the normal ending, and the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the announcement suggestive ending is defined. ) Are defined in association with “25 to 99” (see 222h2 in FIG. 70). For this reason, when the “announcement effect B” is determined in the lottery of the execution of the continuous announcement effect executed during the jackpot, the announcement suggestion ending is made as a jackpot ending effect at a rate of 75% (75/100). Is set. For “announcement effect C”, “0 to 9” is defined in association with the range of the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the normal ending, and the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the advance suggestion ending is defined. The range “10 to 99” is defined in association with the range (see 222h3 in FIG. 70). For this reason, when the “announcement effect C” is determined in the lottery of the execution of the continuous announcement effect executed during the jackpot, the announcement suggestion ending is made as a jackpot ending effect at a rate of 90% (90/100). Is set.

  On the other hand, as a range of a random number value (counter value) corresponding to a case where the continuous announcement effect is not executed after the jackpot (when the continuous announcement effect is not executed), “0 to 94” is defined in association with the announcement suggestion ending. Are defined in association with “95 to 99” as a range of the random number value (counter value) corresponding to (see 222h4 in FIG. 70). For this reason, if the non-execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined in the lottery of the execution of the continuous announcement effect executed during the jackpot, only the ratio of 5% (5/100) is set as the ending effect of the jackpot. No notice suggestion ending is set.

  As described above, in the present modified example, when the continuous announcement effect is not performed, the ratio at which the announcement suggestion ending is set as the ending effect is set extremely low (at a rate of 5%). At the time of execution, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the execution of the continuous announcement effect. Further, in the present modified example, the configuration is such that, as the notice type having the higher degree of expectation of the jackpot is determined, the determination ratio of the notice suggestion ending becomes higher. That is, in the case of “notification effect A” having a relatively low jackpot expectation, the notice suggestion ending is determined at a rate of 50%, and “notification effect B” having a higher jackpot expectation degree than “notice effect A” In the case of, the announcement suggestion ending is determined at a rate of 75%, and in the case of "announcement effect C" with the highest jackpot expectation, the advance announcement ending is determined at a rate of 90%. With this configuration, when the notice suggestion ending is executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the “notification effect C” is determined. In other words, when the notice suggestion ending is executed, the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot can be further increased, so that the player can play the game by paying more attention to the mode of the ending effect.

  In this modification, the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending have a configuration in which the background color is different during the execution of the ending effect, but this is merely an example, and the player has the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending. Any effect mode can be adopted as long as the ending can be distinguished. Specifically, for example, the characters displayed during the ending effect may be different between the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending (for example, the character “Make a note!” In the ending, the character "chance!" Is displayed, and the character displayed during the ending production may be different (for example, a female character is displayed in a normal ending, and a male character is displayed in a preview suggesting ending). Etc.) Furthermore, it is not limited to the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 that the mode differs between the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending. For example, it is possible to change the music played during the ending effect, or By changing the emission colors and emission patterns of the units 29 to 33, the effect mode may be changed between the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending.

  Further, in the present modified example, as a mode of the ending effect, only two types of the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which four types of ending effects are provided, each of which is a type that is more likely to be selected when the notice effect A is executed after the jackpot, and a type that is more likely to be selected when the notice effect B is executed Alternatively, the type selected when the announcement effect C is executed may be set as a high type, and the type selected when the continuous announcement effect is not executed may be set as a high type. With this configuration, it is possible to predict not only the degree of expectation that the continuous announcement effect will be executed, but also the effect type of the announcement effect that is likely to be executed during the ending period from the mode of the ending effect. The game can be played by paying attention to the ending effect mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the present modification will be described. FIG. 69B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 223 according to the present modification. As shown in FIG. 69 (b), the RAM 223 in this modification is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-described fourth embodiment (the same as the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12 (b))). , And a judgment non-execution flag 223q is added. The other configuration is the same as that of the above-described fourth embodiment, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  The determination non-execution flag 223q is a flag indicating whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement effect has been determined at the start of the ending period. If the determination non-execution flag 223q is on, it indicates that the execution of the continuous announcement effect has not been executed at the start of the ending period, and if it is off, it indicates that the execution of the continuous announcement effect has been determined. .

  Here, the present modified example is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect only when the number of reserved balls has accumulated to the upper limit (four) at the start of the ending period. If it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed in a state where the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit, then a new start winning is detected during the execution of the ending effect, and the change type of the new start winning is changed. However, when the continuous announcement effect is set to a higher degree of expectation than the variation type of each reserved ball, a situation occurs in which a fluctuation display with a high degree of expectation is executed immediately after the continuous announcement effect ends. .

  Therefore, in this modified example, the number of reserved balls is accumulated up to the upper limit at the start of the ending period, and only when there is no possibility that the state of the retained balls will change during the ending period, it is determined whether the continuous announcement effect can be executed. Configuration. Then, if it is not determined at the start of the ending period whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined at the end of the jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect by taking into account the variation types of all the retained balls suspended at the end of the jackpot, so that the continuous announcement effect is suitably executed. be able to.

  The determination not-executed flag 223q is set to ON when it is not determined at the start of the ending period whether the continuous announcement effect is executable (see S4908 in FIG. 73), and determines whether the continuous announcement effect is executable at the end of the big hit. In this case, it is set to off (see S4812 in FIG. 72).

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 71 to FIG. 73, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. First, the details of the command determination process 5 (S4141) will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 5 (S4141) is a process executed in place of the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, and is different from the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for performing control according to a command received from main controller 110.

  Of the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, in the processing of S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, S4216, and S4232 to S4237, the command determination in the fourth embodiment is respectively performed. The same processes as S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, S4216, and S4322 to S4237 of process 4 (see FIG. 65) are executed.

  In the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modification of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4209 that a status command has been received (S4209: Yes), the status command process in the fourth embodiment is performed. Instead of (see FIG. 66), state command processing 5 is executed (S4241), and this processing ends. Details of this status command processing 5 (S4241) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modification of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4233 that the command received from the main control device 110 does not include the opening command ( S4233: No), it is determined whether there is an ending command among the commands received from the main control device 110 (S4242). If it is determined in the processing of S4242 that the ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4242: Yes), the ending command processing for selecting the ending effect mode is executed (S4243). The processing ends. The ending command processing (S4243) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the details of the status command processing 5 (S4241) will be described. This state command processing 5 (S4241) is similar to the state command processing (see FIG. 66) in the fourth embodiment, and is based on the game state indicated by the state command received from the main controller 110, and stores the data in the game state storage area 223g. Is a process for updating.

  Of the status command processing 5 (see FIG. 72) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the respective processings of S4801 to S4804 in the status command processing (see FIG. 66) of the fourth embodiment are respectively performed in the respective processings of S4801 to S4804. Is executed.

  In the status command process 5 (see FIG. 72) in the modification of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4802 that the current status command is the command output at the end of the big hit (S4802: (Yes), it is determined whether the determination non-execution flag 223q is on (S4811). If the determination non-execution flag 223q is on (S4811: Yes), it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed at the start of the ending period. Since it indicates that the execution has not been performed, the determination non-execution flag 223q is set to OFF (S4812), and the respective processing of S4803 and S4804 for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect is executed, and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, in the process of S4811, when it is determined that the determination not-executed flag 223q is off (S4811: No), the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined by the fact that the number of the reserved balls has reached the upper limit number at the start of the ending period. Is already determined, the processes of S4812, S4803, and S4804 are skipped, and the process ends.

  By executing the state command processing 5 (see FIG. 72), even if the execution of the continuous announcement effect has not been determined at the start of the ending period, the determination of the execution can be performed at the end of the big hit. Since it is possible, at each time of the jackpot, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed in accordance with the reserved ball held at the start of the jackpot and the variation type of the reserved ball increased during the jackpot.

  Next, the ending command processing (S4243) described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The ending command process is a process for selecting an ending effect mode as described above.

  In the ending command process (see FIG. 73), first, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4901), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 4 (S4902). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit. In the process of S4902, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 4 (S4902: Yes), there is a possibility that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the fluctuation type having a higher degree of expectation during the ending period increases. Since there is no such event, each process of S4903 and S4904 for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect is executed. That is, the notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to ON (S4903), the release determination process is performed (S4904), and the process shifts to S4905. Note that this release-time determination process is exactly the same as the release-time determination process (see FIG. 68) in the fourth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S4905, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the notice number counter 223i is greater than zero. That is, in the cancellation determination process (S4904), the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, and it is determined whether or not a value corresponding to the continuous number of the announcement effect is set in the advance number counter 223i. In the processing of S4905, when it is determined that the counter value of the notice number counter 223i is greater than 0 (S4905: Yes), the effect type of the continuous notice effect determined this time is specified from the state of the notice type flag 223k. Then (S4906), in the ending selection table 222h (see FIG. 70), the range of the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the effect type specified in the process of S4906 is compared with the value of the effect lottery counter 223f (S4907). ).

  Next, the ending type (either normal ending or advance notice suggestion ending) corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223f is determined from the comparison result by the process of S4907 (S4910), and the determined ending type is notified to the display control device 114. An ending command for display is set (S4911), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4902, when it is determined that the value of the read special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is less than 4 (S4902: No), it is determined whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement effect is performed. During the ending period, there is a possibility that a start winning prize corresponding to a variation type having a higher expectation is detected (execution of a continuous announcement effect based on the variation type having the highest expectation suspended at the end of the jackpot) (There is a possibility that the determination of propriety cannot be performed.) Therefore, the determination non-execution flag 223q is set to ON (S4908), and the process shifts to S4909. Also, in the process of S4905, if it is determined that the value of the notice number counter 223i is 0 (that is, the execution of the continuous notice effect was not determined) (S4905: No), the process proceeds to S4909. .

  In the process of S4909, in the endin selection table 222h (see FIG. 70), the range of random number value (counter value) corresponding to the non-execution of the continuous announcement effect (see 222h4 in FIG. 70) and the counter value of the effect lottery counter 223f (S4909), and the process shifts to S4910, where the ending type is determined and the display ending command is set as in the case where the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined.

  By executing the ending command process (see FIG. 73), the ending effect mode can be selected at a rate corresponding to the result of determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. Can be shown, and the degree of expectation according to the notice type can be indicated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the fourth embodiment, at the predetermined timing during the big hit (at the start of the ending period), the preview lottery prohibition state is released to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview effect. And Then, according to the mode of the jackpot ending effect, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation of whether or not the continuous announcement effect is started after the end of the jackpot. Thereby, when the ending effect of the aspect with a high expectation that the continuous announcement effect is executed is executed, the continuous announcement is started from before the third symbol display device 81 starts to display the variation of the third symbol. It is possible to make the player have a stronger sense of expectation for the effect.

  In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the background color during the execution of the ending effect is different between the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending. However, this is only an example, and the normal ending And any effect mode within a range where the notice suggestion ending can be distinguished. Specifically, for example, the characters displayed during the ending effect may be different between the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending (for example, the character “Make a note!” In the ending, the character "chance!" Is displayed, and the character displayed during the ending production may be different (for example, a female character is displayed in a normal ending, and a male character is displayed in a preview suggesting ending). Etc.) Furthermore, it is not limited to the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 that the mode differs between the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending. For example, it is possible to change the music played during the ending effect, or By changing the emission colors and emission patterns of the units 29 to 33, the effect mode may be changed between the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending.

  In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as a mode of the ending effect, only two types, that is, a normal ending and a preview suggestion ending are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which four types of ending effects are provided, each of which is a type that is more likely to be selected when the notice effect A is executed after the jackpot, and a type that is more likely to be selected when the notice effect B is executed Alternatively, the type selected when the announcement effect C is executed may be set as a high type, and the type selected when the continuous announcement effect is not executed may be set as a high type. With this configuration, it is possible to predict not only the degree of expectation that the continuous announcement effect will be executed, but also the effect type of the announcement effect that is likely to be executed during the ending period from the mode of the ending effect. The game can be played by paying attention to the ending effect mode. Alternatively, or in addition to the above, the ending effect of the degree of expectation that the jackpot is included in the holding ball held at the end of the jackpot and the holding ball based on the start winning newly detected during the jackpot is provided. A configuration suggested by an embodiment may be adopted. Also, in this case, a configuration may be provided in which an ending effect mode is selected that is not selected when a jackpot is included, instead of suggesting the degree of expectation. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the ending effect mode.

  In a modified example of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit (four) at the start timing of the ending period, the preliminary announcement lottery prohibition state is released and whether or not to execute the continuous preliminary announcement effect is determined. Although the determination is made, the timing for canceling the announcement lottery prohibition state and the timing for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect are not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a start winning is detected during a big hit, and when the number of pending balls reaches a maximum, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect even if the ending period has not started. With this configuration, at the start timing of the ending period, only the process of selecting the mode of the ending effect needs to be executed, and the timing of determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect can be made different. Therefore, the processing load of the sound ramp control device 113 at the start timing of the ending period can be reduced, so that the selection of the ending effect mode is delayed, and the execution of the ending effect is delayed, or the execution of the continuous announcement effect is performed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) that it becomes impossible to normally select a mode corresponding to the determination result of availability.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the board surface configuration (arrangement of nails, windmills, and the like) of the game board 13 is substantially symmetrical, and the game board 13 is provided with a flow panel provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. A game ball is fired by a game ball fired toward the road (a game ball struck right) and a game ball fired toward a flow path provided on the left side (a game ball struck left). The period from when the ball is reached to the first entrance 64 or the variable winning device 65 is configured to be substantially the same.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the game balls (right-hit game balls) fired toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 on the game board 13 are on the left side. It is configured such that a period until reaching the first ball entrance 64 or the variable winning device 65 is longer than a game ball (a game ball struck left) fired toward the flow path provided in. . In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the variable display device unit 80 has a smaller height than the game balls flowing down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The configuration is such that a game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the left side has a higher percentage of entering the specific winning opening 65a.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a board configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 74, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 2) in the variable display device unit in the game board 13. On the right side of 80, there is provided a detouring object 700 into which a play ball can enter. As will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 75, this detouring accessory 700 extends the time required for a right-hitting (hit on the right side of the game board 13) game ball to reach the specific winning opening 65a. It is provided for. In other words, the detouring object 700 takes a longer time until the game ball fired by right-handing reaches the specific winning opening 65a than in a period until the game ball fired by left-handing reaches the specific winning opening 65a. The falling time of a right-hit game ball can be increased so that the time is longer. In the fifth embodiment, the period until the left-hit game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is 1 second to 2 seconds, whereas the right-hit game ball is placed in the specific winning opening 65a. Is configured to be 7 to 8 seconds.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 75, details of the detouring object 700 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detouring object 700. As shown in FIG. 75, the detouring object 700 has an opening 710 at an upper portion thereof. A game ball fired by right-handing can enter the inside of the bypass accessory 700 through the opening 710. In addition, an opening 720 for discharging a game ball flowing down in the detouring accessory 700 to the outside of the detouring accessory 700 is provided below the detouring accessory 700. Furthermore, in order to prevent the ball that has advanced into the detouring object 700 from being discharged to the outside without passing through the opening 720, the peripheral edge portion 730 has a front side near side, a rear side, and a left and right direction. In four directions. Since the peripheral portion 730 is made of a translucent member (for example, a PS material), a player can easily visually recognize a state in which the ball flows down.

  Further, among the peripheral portion 730, the plane on the back side in the front view can be assembled so as to be substantially flush with the base plate 60, so that a gap is generated between the peripheral portion 730 and the base plate 60, It is possible to suppress the ball from being caught in the gap. Further, the front surface of the peripheral portion 730 and the glass unit 16 are configured so as to be in contact with each other without any gap when the front frame 14 is closed. , A gap can be prevented from being trapped in the gap.

  As shown in FIG. 75, a plurality of flow paths (induction flow paths 740 to 790) that are inclined downward from the detour accessory 700 are provided inside the detour accessory 700. In each of the guide channels 740 to 790, the surface with which the sphere comes in contact has a substantially flat plate shape, and the width thereof is the width of the inner portion of the peripheral portion 730 (the inner wall on the back side in front view, the inner wall on the near side in front view, and ). That is, a gap is formed between the inner portion of the peripheral portion 730 and each of the guide channels 740 to 790, so that the ball can be prevented from passing through the gap.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the guide channels 740, 760, and 780 are inclined in a direction from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in a front view. The guide channels 750, 770, and 790 are inclined so as to descend from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front. Then, the guiding flow paths 740, 750, 760, 770, 780, 790 are arranged in order from the upper side of the detouring object 700. That is, a flow path inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front and a flow path inclined downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front are provided alternately.

  The game ball that has entered the opening 710 first falls into the guiding flow path 740, and flows downward along the slope formed by the guiding flow path 740 in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. Then, when the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide channel 740, the game ball falls from the guide channel 740 toward the guide channel 750. Then, the dropped game ball flows down along the guidance flow path 750 to the lower right direction in front view. When the flowing game ball reaches the lower end of the guide channel 750, the game ball falls into the guide channel 760, and flows down along the slope formed by the guide channel 760 to the lower left in front view.

  Thereafter, the game ball alternately repeats the operation of flowing down along the flow path and the operation of falling down to the lower flow path. Then, the game ball finally reaches the lower end of the guide channel 790 and falls from the lower end of the guide channel 790 toward the opening 720. As a result, the sphere that has entered the bypass accessory 700 is discharged to the outside of the bypass accessory 700 via the opening 720. Each time the flow path of the game ball changes, the direction in which the game ball flows changes (that is, from the lower right direction to the lower left direction or from the lower left direction to the lower right direction). It is possible to reduce the force of the ball flowing down (flowing speed). Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time required for a game ball having entered the detouring object 700 through the opening 710 to be discharged to the outside through the opening 720. As a result, when the ball is fired to the right side of the game board 13 as compared with the case where the game ball is fired to the left side of the game board 13, the ball is moved to the lower portion of the game board 13 (the first entrance 64 or the variable winning prize). The time required to reach the device 65 (the area where the device 65 is disposed) can be lengthened (7 seconds or longer).

  As shown in FIG. 75, the respective guide channels 740 to 790 are supported by the channel support shafts 741 to 791, respectively, and clockwise or counterclockwise with each channel support shaft as a rotation axis. It is configured to be rotatable. In addition, the rotation operation is performed by rotating the lower surfaces of the guide channels 740 to 790 with respect to the rotation stop members 742 a to 792 a or the rotation stop members 742 b to 792 b provided below the respective guide channels 740 to 790. Stops on contact. This rotation operation will be described using the guide channel 740 as an example.

  As described above, the guide channel 740 is configured to be rotatable around the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. This rotation operation is performed based on the weight of the game ball flowing down the guide channel 740. Specifically, when the game ball flows down the upper half of the guide channel 740, the load by the weight of the game ball is applied to the upper half of the guide channel 740, so that the upper half of the guide channel 740 is directed downward. A force is generated in the direction to rotate the That is, since a force acts to rotate the guide channel 740 clockwise in a front view, the guide channel 740 rotates clockwise about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotation operation is stopped when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 contacts the rotation stop member 742b. By this rotation stop member 742b, it is possible to prevent the guide channel 740 from rotating too much clockwise and the inclination of the guide channel 740 from being reversed.

  Here, the rotation stop member 742b is a substantially columnar member, and is joined to the inner wall on the near side and the inner wall on the back side of the peripheral portion 730, respectively. That is, the position is not shifted by the impact when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 comes into contact. The structure of the other rotation stop members 742a to 792a and the rotation stop members 752b to 792b is the same as that of the rotation stop member 742b.

  On the other hand, when the ball flows down the lower half of the guide flow path 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the lower half of the guide flow path 740, so that the lower half of the guide flow path 740 is rotated downward. A directional force occurs. That is, since a force acts in a direction to rotate the guide channel 740 counterclockwise in a front view, the guide channel 740 rotates counterclockwise about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotation operation is stopped when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 contacts the rotation stop member 742a. The rotation stop member 742a can suppress the guide flow path 740 from excessively turning counterclockwise. In other words, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the guide channel 740 from becoming too large, so that the momentum of the game ball cannot be reduced. Therefore, the game ball fired by the right strike can reliably flow down the lower portion of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the specific winning opening 65a are disposed) in 7 seconds or more. . When the game ball flows down in a state where the inclination of each guide channel 740 to 790 is maximized, each guide channel is set so that it takes 7 seconds for the game ball to reach the second entrance 640. A path length of 740 to 790 and a maximum inclination angle are set. Since it is rare that a game ball flows down while all the guide channels 740 to 790 maintain the maximum inclination angle, the time required for the game ball to reach the second entrance 640 is reliably set to 7 seconds or more. be able to.

  In this way, by configuring the inclination of each of the guide channels 740 to 790 to change based on the load of the weight of the game ball, the flow speed of the game ball flowing down each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is varied. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to vary the time required for the game ball to pass through the bypass role 700. Further, in the above description, a case has been described in which one ball travels on the guidance flow path 740, but a state in which a plurality of balls travels on the same guidance flow path during an actual game may occur. In this case, the turning operation of each of the guide channels 740 to 790 can be made more irregular, so that the time until the game ball finishes passing through the detouring object 700 can be varied.

  As shown in FIG. 75, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is processed so that the corners at the left and right ends of the lower surface are rounded as compared with the corners at the left and right ends of the upper surface. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the corners of the lower surface and the inner wall portion of the peripheral portion 730 to come into contact with each other when each of the guide channels 740 to 790 rotates. Therefore, since each of the guide channels 740 to 790 can be arranged at a position closer to the peripheral portion 730, a gap is formed between each of the guide channels 740 to 790 and the peripheral portion 730, and a game ball is formed in the gap. Can be prevented from being pinched or the game ball passing through the gap. In addition, each guide flow path 740 to 790 is configured to return to the arrangement having the largest inclination by its own weight in a state where the game ball is not flowing down. For example, when the ball is not flowing down the guiding flow path 740, the ball rotates counterclockwise in front view with the flow path support shaft 741 as a rotation axis due to the weight of the guiding flow path 740. This rotation operation is performed until the lower surface of the guide flow path contacts the rotation stop member 742a, and stops when the lower surface of the guide channel contacts the rotation stop member 742a. Similarly, the guide channels 750 to 790 are configured to perform a rotation operation until they contact the rotation stop members 752a to 792a by their own weights in a state in which the game ball does not flow down. Thereby, whether the game ball flows down while each of the guide channels 750 to 790 is performing the turning operation, or whether the game ball flows down after the turning operation of each of the guide channels 750 to 790 is completed. The flow speed of the sphere can be varied accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to aim at the second entrance 640.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each guidance flow path 740-790 may not rotate by own weight, but may rotate only by the passage of a game ball. Further, for example, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 may be configured to be rotated regularly or irregularly by a motor or the like.

  Returning to FIG. 74, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 74, a number of nails are provided below the bypass role 700 so as to restrict the flowing direction of the game ball flowing out of the bypass role 700 through the opening 720 on the lower end side of the bypass role 700. Is arranged. With these nails, all game balls flowing out of the detouring object 700 can be dropped on the curved member 800 provided on the left side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front (the first ball entrance 64). It can suppress that the game ball flows down in the direction). The game ball that has fallen on the curved member 800 rolls on the upper surface of the curved member 800 and is guided toward the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 74, since the space between the variable winning device 65 and the curved surface member 800 is very narrow (the width is less than one game ball), the curved surface member is opened when the specific winning opening 65a is opened. Almost all the game balls guided to the left end of 800 can win (enter) the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, on the left side of the variable winning device 65 in a front view, a relatively large space (having a width exceeding one game ball) for guiding the game ball to the out port 66 below the variable winning device 65 is provided. (Flow channel) is provided. For this reason, when the specific winning port 65a is opened, when a game ball is fired by left-handing, many game balls enter the specific winning port 65a, but some of the game balls (for example, 10 The ratio of one ball per ball) is guided from the left side of the variable winning device 65 to the out opening 66 without entering the specific winning opening 65a.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the bypass board 700 and the curved surface member 800 are provided for the flow path on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. As a result, the period until the right-hit game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a can be made longer than the period until the left-hit game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. Basically, the right-handed player takes a longer time to reach the specific winning opening 65a, but depending on the reflection direction of the game ball, the ejection state, and the like, the left-handed player reaches the specific winning opening 65a. The possibility that the period until the arrival reaches a long time is not zero (for example, when the game ball fired in the left direction is temporarily stopped, or when the ball is clogged in the left channel of the variable display device unit 80). etc). For this reason, the game ball flowing down (passing) through the right channel of the variable display device unit 80 is compared with the game ball flowing down (passing) through the left channel to reach the specific winning opening 65a. (The time it takes for the game ball flowing down the left channel to reach the specific winning opening 65a is likely to be shorter).

  In the fifth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the ratio of right-hit game balls entering the specific winning opening 65a is determined by the ratio of left-playing gaming balls to the specific winning opening 65a. Can be higher than the ratio of entering the ball. As a result, a player who wants to proceed with the jackpot game quickly (want to end the jackpot game early) can have a slight loss (a loss of about one ball per ten balls) during the execution of the jackpot game. With the ball prepared, the player can play the game by aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by left-handing. On the other hand, for a player who does not want to generate a useless ball (loss) as much as possible, he or she performs a game aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by right-handing in preparation for a longer jackpot game period. Can be made. Therefore, a favorite game property can be selected for each player during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the game property according to the taste of each player can be realized. Each round of the jackpot ends when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of each round, or when 10 or more game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds have elapsed. Is done. Even if the game ball is started to be fired by right-handing after the start of each round of the jackpot, ten game balls are passed through the detour role object 700 before the elapse of 30 seconds, and the specific winning opening 65a (10 game balls can be entered in about 13 to 14 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage that the winning sphere is disadvantageous (the round ends before the specified number of gaming balls wins the specific winning opening 65a) when the right hit is performed.

  Next, a display mode during execution of the big hit game in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 76, in the fifth embodiment, when a big hit occurs, substantially rectangular display areas HR2 and HR3 are formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm in front view and the upper right side in front view. A display region HR4 having a substantially rectangular shape and a larger area than the display regions HR2 and HR3 is formed below the display regions HR2 and HR3. In the display area HR2, an image imitating a left-pointing arrow is displayed, and characters "left-handed and high-speed mode" and characters "can easily digest a big hit" are displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that if the player hits the left during the jackpot, the jackpot can be consumed in a relatively short period of time (the jackpot proceeds at a relatively high speed). Can be.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 76, an image imitating a rightward arrow is displayed in the display region HR3, and the character "Right-handed low-speed mode" and "You can slowly digest the big hit" are displayed. And characters are displayed. From these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that a right hit during the jackpot allows the jackpot to be consumed over a relatively long time (the jackpot proceeds at a relatively low speed). Can be done.

  As shown in FIG. 76, various images and information indicating that a big hit is being displayed are displayed in the display area HR4. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76, an image TB imitating a treasure chest containing a large amount of gold coins is displayed in the center portion of the display region HR4, and “ A display area HR6 with the character "big hit" is formed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the big hit game is being executed. A display area HR5 for displaying characters indicating the progress status of the jackpot (the number of rounds or the number of paid out prize balls) is formed on the upper left inside the display area HR4. In the example of FIG. 76, the character “ROUND: 01/16” (information indicating the comparison between the current round number and the maximum round number) and the character “GET: 0000/1600” (the prize ball until now) Is displayed, which indicates a comparison between the number of payouts and the maximum number of payouts. The display contents displayed in these display areas HR5 allow the player to easily understand the progress status of the jackpot.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the period until the right-hit game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is longer than the time until the left-hit game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. It is configured to be long. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the rate at which right-hit game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a is determined by the ratio of left-played game balls to the specific winning opening. It is configured to be higher than the ratio of entering the ball 65a. With such a configuration, a player who wants to rapidly progress the jackpot game (want to acquire a large amount of prize balls in a shorter time) can receive a small loss (one ball per 10 balls) during the execution of the jackpot game. The player can play a game aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by left-handing while preparing for a useless ball (about a percentage of useless balls). On the other hand, for a player who does not want to generate a useless ball (loss) as much as possible, the player can aim at the specific winning opening 65a by right-handing in preparation for a longer jackpot game period. Can be performed. Therefore, a favorite game property can be selected for each player during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the game property according to the taste of each player can be realized.

  In the fifth embodiment, by providing the detouring object 700 on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the period until the game ball fired by right-handing reaches the variable winning device 65 is left-handed. Is configured to be longer than a period until the game ball fired by the player reaches the variable winning device 65. That is, by making the path length when the game ball fired by the right strike falls down, longer than the path length when the game ball fired by the left strike falls, Although the configuration was made so that the downflow time was longer than performing the beating, the invention is not limited to this. For example, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view, a configuration may be provided in which a well-known clown unit is provided instead of the detour body 700. With this configuration, it is possible to lengthen the period from reaching the clune means to passing the clune means, so that the flow time of the game ball shot rightward can be lengthened. Further, for example, instead of the detouring role 700, a role for stopping the flow of the game ball for a predetermined period may be provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the base plate 60 The right side of the game board 13 is made of a material (for example, an elastic body such as rubber) having a higher friction coefficient than the left side, so that the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 13 is lower than that of the base plate 60. May be configured to be easily decelerated by friction. In addition, instead of the detouring object 700, by disposing the nails in the left flow path and the right flow path of the variable display device unit 80 in different positions, it is better to flow down the right flow path to the left flow path. A configuration may be adopted in which the period until reaching the lower area (the area where the first entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) of the game board 13 is longer than when the road flows down.

  In the fifth embodiment, during the big hit, in the third symbol display device 81, the game performance when the player hits the left and the game when the player hits the right are displayed in the display region HR2 and the display region HR3, respectively. However, the display is not limited to this. For example, during a big hit, a configuration may be adopted in which only an image prompting left-handing is displayed, or only an image prompting right-handing is displayed. By displaying only the image that prompts the player to hit left, the big hit can be completed in a short time, so that a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short time. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved. Further, by displaying only the image that prompts the player to make a right hit, it is possible to reduce wasteful balls (game balls that enter the out port 66 without entering the specific winning opening 65a). The player's profit at the jackpot can be increased.

  Further, when notifying the player of the launch direction during the jackpot, the launch direction to be notified may be changed according to the type of the jackpot, the type of the effect performed during the jackpot, and the like. More specifically, for example, in the event of a probability change jackpot, a variable display effect (an effect mode executed only when a probability change jackpot is performed) in which main symbols (probability change symbols) with odd numbers are aligned is executed. It is configured to determine by lottery whether to perform a variable display effect (an effect mode that is always executed in the case of a normal jackpot) in which the main symbols (normal symbols) with even numbers are aligned. And when it is a normal jackpot or a probability variable jackpot, and when an effect in which the normal symbols are aligned by lottery is determined, an effect of notifying whether or not the probability variable jackpot is during the jackpot is performed. . In this case, an effect mode for notifying whether or not the jackpot is a probability change jackpot (for example, an effect of not knowing whether or not the jackpot is a probability change jackpot until the last round of the jackpot, and immediately informing at the end of the first round) The player is allowed to select one of an effect mode that is performed and an effect mode that is not known where in each round of the jackpot is notified (that is, operating means such as buttons and levers that can be operated by the player). May be provided to determine the effect mode corresponding to the operation content), and the effect mode may be selected in the first round. Then, in order to secure a longer time for selecting the effect mode, in the first round of the jackpot (the jackpot of the normal symbol notification) notified by the variable display effect in which the normal symbols are aligned, a configuration suggesting right-handing is provided. It may be. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a longer period for allowing the player to select an effect mode, so that the player can more reliably select a desired effect mode. On the other hand, in the case where the player is not prompted to make any selection in the first round (for example, when the jackpot is notified by the variable display effect in which the positively-variable symbols are aligned), a configuration may be adopted in which the left hit is notified during the jackpot. . With this configuration, the period until the jackpot ends can be shortened, so that a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

  In addition, for example, when a normal jackpot or a probability variable jackpot is determined and an effect in which normal symbols are aligned by lottery is determined, an effect of notifying whether or not a probability variable jackpot is performed in the first round of the jackpot is executed. The effect (operation effect) for prompting the operation of the operation means may be executed in the effect. More specifically, for example, a push button that can be pressed by a player is provided as an operation means, and an effect is performed to prompt the player to continuously press the push button within a predetermined period. Then, according to the number of times the push button is pressed, the display mode is changed (for example, the gauge of the indicator is accumulated), and the display mode is changed to a specific display mode in conjunction with the pressing (for example, the gauge is changed). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is reported that the probability is a big hit by accumulating to the maximum of the indicator). In this case, when a normal jackpot or a probable variable jackpot is determined and an effect in which the normal symbols are aligned by lottery is determined (when an operation effect is executed), the right hit is notified in the first round of the jackpot. With this configuration, the round period of one round can be made relatively long, so that a longer period for performing the operation effect can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the operation effect. On the other hand, when a stochastic jackpot is determined and an effect in which the stochastic symbols are aligned by lottery is determined (when the operation effect is not executed), the left hit is notified in the first round, so that the jackpot is achieved. It is possible to shorten the period until the end. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

  In addition, instead of selecting the production mode when notifying whether or not the jackpot is a probability change jackpot, for example, in the first round, the type of the music (production by voice) to be reproduced during the execution of the jackpot game is set. It may be configured to be selectable, and to notify at least right-handing during a period for selecting music (music selection period). More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, a music selection menu screen for selecting the type of music (production by sound) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the music selection menu screen, images corresponding to a plurality of (for example, ten) musics set in the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an operation means such as a button which can be operated by the player instead of or in addition to the frame button 22, and is displayed on the music selection menu screen according to the operation content of the operation means. Is configured to be selectable. For example, on the music selection menu screen, images corresponding to each music are arranged in a vertical line, and one image (for example, the image displayed in the center) has a lighted appearance, and the other images have a lighted appearance. The configuration is as follows. Also, a configuration is provided in which three types of buttons are provided as operation means: a button corresponding to upward movement (up button), a button corresponding to downward movement (down button), and a button corresponding to determination operation (determination button). I do. Then, by detecting the press of the upper button during the music selection period, the image which had been turned on until immediately before the press was changed to the turned off appearance, and the image arranged one above was switched to the turned on appearance. (The illuminated visual image moves upward by one). Similarly, when a press on the down button is detected, the illuminated visual image is moved down by one. Further, by detecting pressing of the determination button during the music selection period, the music corresponding to the image which is turned on at the time of pressing and has a visual appearance is determined as the music to be reproduced during the current big hit. That is, the music is set to be reproduced from the end of the first round to the end of the last round of the jackpot. With such a configuration, the favorite music of the player can be reproduced during the jackpot, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot game can be further improved.

  Under such circumstances, if the left hit is reported in the first round of the jackpot, the first round ends relatively early, and the music selection period is also shortened. For this reason, there is a possibility that the music selection period ends before the player selects a favorite music by operating the up button and the down button and sets the reproduction with the enter button. On the other hand, the right-handing is notified during the first round (song selection period) of the jackpot in which the song selection period is set (the execution of a performance to select a song is determined), thereby making one round. Since the eye round period can be set to a relatively long period, the player searches for a desired song from the song selection menu screen (operate the up button and down button so that the corresponding image looks lit) Then, a longer period for determining (pressing the determination button) can be secured. This allows the user to reliably select a favorite music without hurting the player, thereby improving the convenience of the player when selecting the music. In addition, the configuration is such that a left hit is notified during the first round of a jackpot in which no music selection period is set (a jackpot in which a normal jackpot effect is executed), thereby preventing the game from being delayed and speedy. The jackpot game can be digested. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of an appropriate firing direction according to the presentation mode executed during the big hit.

  Further, in the case where an effect (operation effect) for prompting the player to operate the operation means, such as setting a music selection period in the first round, is executed at a predetermined rate when the jackpot is won, the past A configuration in which the firing direction to be notified in the first round may be changed according to the operation status (operation history). More specifically, for example, it is configured to be able to store information (operation history) as to whether or not the player has performed an operation on the operation means in the first round of the jackpot in which the operation effect is set. Then, when the jackpot in which the operation effect is set is started, the game is played over the jackpot in which the predetermined number of operation effects (for example, five times) are set based on the stored past operation history. When the player has not performed the operation, the left hit may be informed, while when the player has performed the operation in the jackpot within a predetermined number of times, the right may be notified. In other words, for a player who tends to perform no operation even when the operation effect is executed, the first round of the jackpot is ended earlier by notifying the left-handed so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in a short time. While realizing the playability that can be acquired, for players who tend to actively operate during the operation production, the execution time of the operation production is prolonged by notifying the right-handed, and the player in the operation production A period for performing a sufficient operation on the operation means can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gaming property according to the tendency of the player.

  In the fifth embodiment, the right-handed player has a prize spherical surface by adopting a board configuration in which a right-handed player has a higher ball entry rate to the specific winning opening 65a than a left-handed player. Although the configuration is slightly advantageous, the configuration for making right-handing advantageous with a prize sphere is not limited to this. For example, instead of keeping the game ball fired by a right strike and the game ball fired by a left strike at the same rate of entering the specific winning opening 65a, instead of the same ratio, the right side of the specific winning opening 65 (that is, left-handed) (A position at which the game ball becomes difficult to enter and a right-hit game ball can enter) may be provided with a general winning opening having a relatively large number of prize balls (for example, 15). That is, in the state where the specific winning opening 65a is open, a left-hit game ball basically enters the specific winning opening 65a, and some game balls cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a and exit. A configuration may be such that, while flowing down to the mouth 66, a right-hit game ball basically enters the specific winning opening 65a, and some game balls enter the general winning opening. With this configuration, when the player makes a right-handed hit, the prize ball obtained by entering the general winning opening is a prize ball due to a jackpot (that is, the game ball is entered into the specific winning opening 65a). Is given in addition to the prize sphere, so that a right-handed hit during the jackpot can be advantageous in the prize sphere. Therefore, a player who wants to obtain more prize balls can be made to make a right-handed shot in preparation for a longer jackpot period. On the other hand, for players who want to win a jackpot prize ball in a shorter period of time, make a left hit during the jackpot in preparation for being a little more disadvantageous than a right hit on the prize sphere Can be.

  In the fifth embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the configuration in which the right-handed feature and the left-handed feature are simply displayed in the display areas HR2 and HR3 (see FIG. 76). ), But is not limited to this. For example, a sensor capable of detecting whether a right strike or a left strike is performed at a predetermined position of the game board 13 (for example, in the middle of the left channel and the right channel of the variable display device unit 80). Or the like may be provided, and the direction in which the player is firing the game ball may be determined based on the detection result by the detecting means. And it is good also as a structure which makes the effect during a big hit variable according to the determined firing direction. For example, when a right strike is detected, the display area HR2 is turned off and the display area HR3 is turned on. When a left strike is detected, the display area HR2 is turned on and the display area HR3 is turned on. It may be configured so as to be turned off. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand what kind of playability is achieved depending on the firing direction selected by the player.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described fifth embodiment, the game board 13 has a flow path provided on the right side of the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 as compared with a flow path provided on the game board 13. In such a case, the time required to reach the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) is likely to be longer in the case where the player falls down. The path length of the flow path, the flowing direction of the game ball, and the like were configured. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened (that is, during the execution of the jackpot game), the game is played by right-handing than when the game ball is fired by left-handing. The game board 13 having a board surface configuration that makes it easier to win (enter) the specific winning opening 65a at a higher rate when the ball is fired.

  In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, a right variable winning device 650 is provided in addition to the variable winning device 65 as a variable winning device that is opened and closed during a big hit. The right specific winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 is set to an open state in which a ball can be entered in the first round of the jackpot, and a special symbol is reliably changed after the jackpot is completed by a game ball entering the jackpot. Granted. On the other hand, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened after the second round of the jackpot, and only a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded when a game ball enters. In addition, the right specific winning opening 650a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both when the player hits the ball left and when the player hits the ball rightward. Is continued, the number of game balls reaching the right variable winning device 650 while the right specific winning opening 650a can enter the ball increases, but the ratio of reaching gaming balls entering the right specific winning opening 650a. Is configured to be low. On the other hand, when the right-handed player keeps hitting right in the first round, the number of game balls reaching the right variable winning device 650 while the right specific winning opening 650a is allowed to enter is reduced, but the reached game is reached. The configuration is such that the ratio of the ball entering the right specific winning opening 650a increases. Because of these, the gaming ability in the first round of the jackpot can be made different depending on the launch direction of the game ball, and therefore, for each player, the desired gaming ability (the ball entry rate to the right specific winning opening 650a is low) Instead, it is possible to select one of a game property in which the number of game balls to be reached increases, and a game property in which the ball entry rate increases instead of the small number of games reached.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is different. , And the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the sixth section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the sixth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 77, in the gaming board 13 of the sixth embodiment, a curved member 810 is provided instead of the curved member 800 provided in the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 74) of the fifth embodiment. Are different. As shown in FIG. 77, a right variable winning device 650 is disposed on a part of the slope of the curved member 810.

  The right variable winning device 650 is provided with a horizontally-specified right specific winning opening 650a at a substantially central portion thereof. This specific winning opening 650a is normally closed by the opening / closing door 650f1 (that is, it is set in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball). It is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern every time. In other words, in the first round of the jackpot, the state in which the ball can enter the right specific winning opening 650a and the state in which it is difficult to enter the ball are switched in a specific switching pattern. When the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a while the opening / closing door 650f1 is open (while the ball can enter the right specific winning opening 650a), the gaming state after the end of the big hit is changed. , The special symbol is set to the probable change state, and the normal symbol is set to the time saving state (at the end of the big hit, the probable change flag 203e is set to ON). On the other hand, if the gaming ball has never entered the right specific winning opening 650a in one jackpot, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot becomes the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Is set (100 is set as the value of the counter 203f during the working hours). In other words, it is more advantageous for a player when a game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a than when no gaming ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot. (The game state after the end of the jackpot is advantageous).

  As shown in FIG. 77, since the right specific winning opening 650a is disposed along the curved path on the upper surface of the curved member 810, the game ball that has passed through the detour member 700 and dropped on the curved member 810 is By rolling along the upper surface of the curved member 810, it is possible to easily reach the right specific winning opening 650a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 77, the left end of the upper surface of the curved member 810 and the left end of the right specific winning opening 650a are disposed on substantially the same horizontal plane. In addition, the curved member 820 provided below the left flow path in the game board 13 is configured such that the height of the right end on the upper surface thereof is higher than the height of the left end under the condition of the curved member 810. . As shown in FIG. 77, a plurality of nails are arranged between the curved surface members 820 and 810 so as to form a downward slope from the curved surface member 820 toward the curved surface member 810. With these configurations, when the game ball that has been hit left and passed through the left channel of the variable display device unit 80 has reached the upper surface of the curved member 820, the upper surface of the curved member 820 is rolled and the curved surface member 820 is rotated. Reach the right end. The game ball ejected rightward in front view from the right end of the curved member 820 flows downward and rightward in front view while interfering with a nail set between the curved member 820 and the curved member 810. Then, it reaches the left end of the curved surface member 810. A game ball that has reached the upper surface of the curved member 810 from the left side with respect to the curved member 810 can easily reach the right specific winning opening 650a by rolling the upper surface of the curved member 810 rightward when viewed from the front. Can be. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball can reach the right variable winning device 650 both when the player hits right and when the player hits the left. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball can be fired in a desired direction.

  Next, the structure of the right variable winning device 650 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 (a) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device 650 in a state where the opening / closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 is closed (a state where it is difficult for game balls to enter the right specific winning opening 650a). FIG. 78 (b) shows that the opening / closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 is switched from the closed state to the open state (the gaming ball is switched from a state where it is difficult to enter the right specific winning opening 650a to a state where it can enter). It is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device 650 in a state.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), in a state where the right specific winning opening 650a is closed, a right variable winning device out of the left end of the opening / closing door 650f1 for closing the right specific winning opening 650a and the upper surface of the curved member 810. The portion on the left side of 650 (left floor surface 810b) is smoothly connected with almost no level difference. On the other hand, at the right end of the opening / closing door 650f1, a convex portion 650g1 for suppressing a game ball rolling from the left in front view from passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 and rolling rightward is provided. Is provided. Since the convex portion 650g1 protrudes from the upper surface of the door 650f1, the game ball rolling on the door 650f1 from the left side of the door 650f1 is prevented from rolling by the convex portion 650g1 and rolls. Motion stops. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), since the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 is inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front, the game ball whose rolling is prevented by the convex portion 650g1 is opened and closed. The upper surface of the door 650f1 flows downward toward the lower left in front view. Then, the left floor 810b rolls leftward in front view, and falls from the left end of the curved member 810 toward the out opening 66. It should be noted that a game ball flowing down from the right side of the right variable winning device 650 (rolling along the right floor surface 810a) has a strong downward flow due to the inclination of the right floor surface 810, so that the opening / closing door is opened. In a state where 650f1 is closed, it is possible to get over the convex portion 650g1 and flow down to the direction of the out port 66. In this manner, by arranging the right variable winning device 650 at an angle, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being stored in the upper portion of the opening / closing door 650f1 during the period in which the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed, and to the out opening 66. And can flow down.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), in the first round of the jackpot, when the right specific winning opening 650a switches to a state in which a ball can be entered, the opening / closing door 650f1 blocking the upper side of the right specific winning opening 650a becomes: The sliding door 650f1 is opened by sliding to the left in front view. As shown in FIG. 78 (b), while the opening / closing door 650f1 is being opened, the game ball rolling from the right side in the front view can enter the right specific winning opening 650a, but rolls from the left side in the front view. The moving game ball is blocked by the convex portion 650g1, and it is difficult to enter the right specific winning opening 650. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 79, when the opening / closing door 650f1 is completely opened, the upper end of the convex portion 650g1 and the left floor surface 810b have substantially the same height (substantially smoothly connected). Therefore, the game ball rolling from the left side with respect to the right variable winning device 650 can also pass through the convex portion 650g1 and enter the right specific winning opening 650a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a description will be given of the downward flow direction of the game ball that has reached the right variable winning device 650 when the open / close door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 is closed and opened. . First, FIG. 79A is a cross-sectional view of the right variable winning device 650 and the curved member 810 in a state where the opening / closing door 650f1 is completely opened. As shown in FIG. 79 (a), when the door 650f1 is completely opened, the height of the upper end of the protrusion 650g1 provided at the right end of the door 650f1 is substantially the same as the height of the left floor surface 810b. Therefore, the game ball that has rolled from the left in the front view with respect to the right variable winning device 650 can easily pass through the convex portion 650g1. That is, it is possible to easily enter (win) the right specific winning opening 650a without being hindered by the convex portion 650g1. Also, game balls that have rolled from the right in the front view to the right variable prize device 650 (flowed down along the right floor surface 810a) also prevent entry (winning) to the right specific winning opening 650a. Does not exist, the player can easily enter (win) the right specific winning opening 650a.

  FIG. 79 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right variable winning device 650 and the curved member 810 in a state where the opening / closing door 650f1 is completely closed. As shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed, the right specific winning opening 650a is closed by the opening / closing door 650f1, so that the game ball cannot enter the ball. In this state, the game ball rolling from the left in the front view with respect to the right variable winning device 650 is subjected to gravity in the lower left direction due to the upward climb formed by the opening / closing door 650f1. Therefore, the rolling momentum is reduced. In addition, since a convex portion 650g1 protruding above the other portion of the opening / closing door 650f1 is provided at the right end of the opening / closing door 650f1, the momentum of the rolling to the right is strong, and the opening / closing door 650f1 is almost Even if it is possible to climb up, reaching the right floor surface 810a side is prevented by the convex portion 650g1. Therefore, it flows down in the lower left direction along the inclination of the opening / closing door 650f1, and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66.

  On the other hand, the game ball that has rolled from the right in the front view with respect to the right variable winning device 650 has a state in which sufficient momentum for overcoming the convex portion 650g1 is added due to the inclination formed by the right floor surface 810a. Therefore, the user can get over the convex portion 650g1 and pass through the door 650f1. Accordingly, the curved member 810 can be dropped from the left end toward the out port 66.

  Next, an opening pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1 (right specific winning opening 650a) in the first round of the jackpot will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, in the sixth embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the jackpot type (jackpot A6) in which the right specific winning opening 650a is set to be able to enter a ball for a relatively long period, A jackpot type (jackpot B6) set to a possible state is provided. If the state in which the ball can be entered becomes longer, the chance that the game ball is made to enter the right specific winning opening 650a increases, so that the gaming state after the end of the big hit is advantageous (the state of the special symbol being positively changed and the normal symbol being shortened) State) is more likely to be set. Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot A6 is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B6 (the game state after the jackpot is more likely to be in an advantageous state). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the open pattern of the right specific winning opening 650a set in the first round of the jackpot A6 is referred to as an open pattern capable of winning a V, and the right specific set in the first round of the big hit B6. The open pattern of the winning opening 650a is referred to as an open pattern in which it is difficult to win a V.

  FIG. 80 (a) is a diagram showing a temporal change of the state of the right specific winning opening 650a when an open pattern in which a V winning is possible (open pattern set in the first round of the big hit A6) is set. . When the open pattern allowing the V prize is set, first, the right specific winning opening 650a is kept closed for 1.5 seconds from the start of the first round. Then, when 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the right specific winning opening 650a is switched from the closed state to the open state. As shown in FIG. 80A, it takes 0.3 seconds after the opening operation of the right specific winning opening 650a is started until the right specific winning opening 650a is completely opened. Therefore, the state is completely opened 1.8 seconds after the start of the first round. This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds, and the closing operation of the right specific winning opening 650a is started when 0.2 seconds elapse (ie, 2.0 seconds after the start of the first round). . This closing operation is completed in 0.3 seconds as in the opening operation (completely closed 2.3 seconds after the start of one round). When the right specific winning opening 650a is completely closed, the state where the right specific winning opening 650a is closed continues for 0.5 second. Then, when 0.5 seconds elapse (that is, when 2.8 seconds elapse from the start of the first round), the right specific winning opening 650a is opened again. In this opening operation, the same operation as the first opening operation is repeated. That is, it is completely opened for 0.3 seconds, maintained in the opened state for 0.2 seconds, and closed for 0.3 seconds.

  After that, a completely closed state for 0.5 seconds and an opening operation for 0.8 seconds (the right specific winning opening 650a is completely opened for 0.3 seconds, and the opened state is 0.2 seconds (A series of operations that are maintained and closed over 0.3 seconds). By this repetitive operation, in the open pattern in which the V prize can be won, the open operation for 0.8 seconds is repeated six times in the first round of the jackpot. Further, as shown in FIG. 80A, the last opening / closing operation is executed after 8.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round. Here, in the sixth embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, a bypass member 700 for extending the flow time of the game ball is provided in the right flow path of the variable display device unit 80. . When the right-hit game ball passes through the detouring object 700, an area below the game board 13 (an area where the first entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the right variable winning device 650 are equally disposed). ) Is 7 to 8 seconds as in the fifth embodiment. Therefore, when right hitting is started in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball reaches the right variable winning device 650 in at least 7 seconds or more from the start of the round. Therefore, in the case of right-handed, the game ball reaches the right variable winning device 650 around the start of the last opening period in the opening pattern in which the V prize can be won (after 8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round). . Therefore, in the case of right-handing in the first round, there is a possibility that the game ball can enter the right specific winning opening 650a only in the last opening period of the six opening periods. is there.

  On the other hand, if the left hit is continued in the first round of the jackpot, the area below the game board 13 (the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the right variable winning device, in about 1 second to 2 seconds). Since the game ball reaches the area where the game balls 650 are equally arranged, if the player hits the ball immediately at the start of the first round, the game ball can reach the specific winning opening 650a from the first opening period. it can. That is, it is possible to obtain a maximum of six opportunities to enter the right specific winning opening 650a. However, as described above, the game ball rolling from the left toward the right specific winning opening 650a is one opening period (completely closed after the opening is started) compared to the game ball rolling from the right. (0.8 seconds until the game is completed), the period during which the ball can enter the right specific winning opening 650a is shortened. Furthermore, the number of game balls that cannot reach the right variable winning device 650 increases when the player hits the ball leftward as compared to when the player hits the ball rightward. That is, by passing through a plurality of nails erected between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810, the game ball enters the out port 66 without reaching the curved surface member 810, There is a case where a ball enters the 1 entrance 64. Therefore, when the open pattern that allows the V prize is set, the number of game balls that reach while the right specific winning opening 650a is open is large by performing left-handing in the first round. The ball has a lower percentage of balls, and the number of useless balls increases, resulting in game play. On the other hand, when the right hit is performed in the first round of the jackpot, the number of game balls reaching while the right specific winning opening 650a is open is small, but the ratio of entering the ball is high. It becomes. Therefore, the playability of the first round can be changed according to the firing direction of the game ball, so that the interest of the player in the first round of the jackpot can be improved. It should be noted that the possibility of a game ball entering during one round is substantially the same (for example, a ratio of about 80%) when the right hit is performed in the first round of the jackpot and when the left hit is performed. Thus, the opening period, the board configuration, and the like are set.

  FIG. 80 (b) is a diagram showing a temporal change of the state of the right specific winning opening 650a when an open pattern in which it is difficult to win the V (open pattern set in the first round of the big hit B6) is set. is there. When an open pattern in which it is difficult to win the V is set, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the right specific winning opening 650a is opened at the same time as the start of the first round, and is closed immediately after being completely opened. You. Therefore, it is extremely difficult to make the game ball enter the right specific winning opening 650a while the right specific winning opening 650a is open, both when the player hits left or right. The possibility that a game ball will enter during one round is almost 0%). For this reason, when a jackpot is won, it is possible to make the player expect that the jackpot type becomes the jackpot A6 (an open pattern in which the V prize can be won is set).

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the state of the open / close door 650f1 during one open period in more detail when the open pattern allowing the V prize is set. As shown in FIG. 81, until the opening operation is started, the upper part of the right specific winning opening 650a is closed by the opening / closing door 650f1, so that the game ball is placed in the right specific winning opening 650a. It is impossible to enter the ball (see FIG. 81 (a)). Then, at the opening start timing of the opening / closing door 650f1, the opening / closing door 650f1 slides leftward in a front view, and is stored inside the curved member 810. When 0.1 second elapses from the start of the opening operation, the width of the portion of the right specific winning opening 650a whose upper part is not closed by the opening / closing door 650f1 is equal to or more than the width of one game ball (FIG. 81). (B)). Thereby, the game ball rolling from the right direction can enter the right specific winning opening 650a. On the other hand, the game ball rolling from the left direction is tilted upward in the upper right direction formed by a portion of the opening / closing door 650f1 that is not housed inside the curved member 810, and the convex portion 650g1 causes the game ball to roll to the right. This prevents entry into the specific winning opening 650a. That is, the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter the right specific winning opening 650a as in the state where the opening / closing door 650f1 is completely closed. This state in which the game ball rolling from the right side can enter the right specific winning opening 650a and the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter the ball continues for 0.1 second. Then, when 0.1 second elapses (that is, when 0.2 second elapses from the start of the opening operation), most of the opening / closing door 650f1 is housed inside the curved surface 810 (the convex portion 650g1 and the left floor surface 810b are closed). The width between the right end and the game ball is less than one game ball), so that the game ball reaching the right end of the left floor 810b passes directly above the convex portion 650g1 without passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1. (See FIG. 81 (c)). Therefore, a game ball that has rolled from the left side in the front view with respect to the right variable winning device 650 can pass through the convex portion 650g1 and enter the right specific winning opening 650a. That is, both the game ball rolling from the right (the game ball fired by right-handed) and the game ball rolling from the left (the game ball fired by the left-handed) are both the right specific winning opening 650a. It is possible to enter the ball. Thereafter, until the opening / closing door 650f1 is completely opened, the game balls rolling from both directions (both right and left sides) can enter the right specific winning opening 650a.

  As shown in FIG. 81, when 0.3 seconds elapse after the opening operation is started, the opening / closing door 650f1 is completely housed inside the curved surface member 810, and only the projection 650g1 is exposed to the outside (opening / closing door 650f1). 650f1 is completely opened) (see FIG. 81 (d)). This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds as described above, and after 0.2 seconds, the closing operation is started. In the closing operation, the operation opposite to the opening operation is performed in the same time (ie, 0.3 seconds). For this reason, during the period from when the opening operation is started to when the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed again, the game ball can enter the right variable winning device 650a during the right-handing. This is 0.6 seconds from the elapse of 0.1 seconds from the start to 0.1 seconds before the opening and closing door 650f1 is completely closed. On the other hand, when left-handed, the time is 0.4 seconds from 0.2 seconds after the start of the opening operation to 0.2 seconds before the opening / closing door 650f1 is completely closed. That is, the ratio of game balls reaching the right variable winning device 650 is higher when the player hits right than when the player hits left.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the period in which the game ball can be made to the right specific winning opening 650a is the game ball that has reached the right variable winning device 650 from the right side or has reached from the left side. It is configured to be variable depending on whether it is a game ball. Accordingly, when a game ball reaches the right variable winning device 650 from the right side, it can be more strongly expected to enter the right specific winning opening 650a. Further, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, more gaming balls are provided to the right variable winning device 650 in the first round of the jackpot when the left hit is performed than when the right hit is performed. It is a configuration that reaches the target. Therefore, when the left hit is performed in the first round of the jackpot, the gaming ball is difficult to enter the right specific winning opening 650a, but it is possible to realize the gaming property having a lot of opportunities to enter the ball, while the right When the player hits the game ball, the game ball can easily enter the left specific winning opening 650a, but it is possible to realize a game property with few opportunities to enter the ball. Therefore, since the playability in the first round of the jackpot can be changed depending on the firing direction of the game ball, the interest of the player in the game in the first round can be improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, by providing the convex portion 650g1 at the right end of the opening / closing door 650f1, the period during which the game ball rolling from the left can enter the right specific winning opening 650a is turned from the right. The configuration is such that the period during which the moving game ball can enter is shorter than the period during which the moving ball can enter, but it is not always necessary to provide the convex portion 650g1. Even if the convex portion 650g1 is deleted, it rolls from the left side during the opening operation of the door 650f1 (for example, the arrangement shown in FIG. 81 (b)) due to the upward-sloping inclination formed by the door 650f1. It is possible to suppress the game ball that has entered the right specific winning opening 650a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, it is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the first round of the big hit A6 (big hit in which a V-winning open pattern is set) in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, when the first round of the jackpot A6 is started, the characters “mode in which several hits are made with a left-handed hit” are displayed on the display area HR2 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and “ A character that reads "The number of arrivals is large but it is difficult to enter V!" And an image imitating a left-pointing arrow are displayed. According to these display contents, when a left hit is performed, more game balls can reach the right variable winning device 650, but it becomes difficult for game balls to enter the right specific winning opening 650a (V winning). This makes it easier for the player to understand that the game becomes easy to play.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 82, in the display area HR3, a character "Right-hit one-shot killing mode", a character "The number of arrivals is small but it is easy to enter V!", And a rightward arrow are simulated. Is displayed. According to these display contents, when the player hits right, the number of game balls reaching the right variable winning device 650 decreases, while the game balls easily enter the right specific winning opening 650a (the V winning becomes easy). This makes it easy for the player to understand that the character is a character.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 82, an image imitating the right variable winning device 650 and the curved surface member 810 is displayed in the display area HR4 of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, a state in which a decoration imitating the alphabet “V” is applied is displayed on the front side of the variable winning device 650 in front view, and “Aim for V!” Is displayed on the upper left side of the display area HR4 in front view. "!" Is displayed in the display area HR7. According to these display contents, by causing the game ball to enter the right variable prize device 650 provided with a decoration imitating the character “V”, an advantageous result for the player is obtained (after the jackpot is over). It is possible for the player to easily understand that the special symbol is in a probable change state).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 82, with respect to the display area HR4, the image of the right variable winning device 650 faces the left variable winning device 650 to the left and the upper right side in a front view with respect to the image imitating the right variable winning device 650, respectively. The image of the arrow is displayed. The image of the arrow displayed on the left side in the front view with respect to the image imitating the right variable winning device 650 has the character "hit a few hits" attached thereto, and the image of the arrow displayed on the upper right side in the front view The image is marked with the words "One-shot kill". According to these display contents, when the player makes a left hit according to the display content of the display area HR2 (a mode in which several hits are selected), a game ball is placed on the right variable winning device 650 from the front left direction. It is possible for the player to easily understand that rolling occurs. In addition, when the player makes a right-handed hit according to the display content of the display area HR3 (selects the one-shot hit mode), the game ball rolls on the right variable winning device 650 from the upper right direction in front view. That can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand in which direction the player can check whether the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a.

<Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 202 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83A, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 9A). The difference is that a pattern table 202aa is added. Further, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are changed. The other configuration is the same as that of the fifth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The open pattern table 202aa is a data table in which the open pattern of the right specific winning opening 650a in the first round of the jackpot (either the open pattern that can win a V or the open pattern that is difficult to win a V) is defined for each jackpot type. . The opening pattern table 202aa defines data indicating the start timing of the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 650f1. At the start of the first round of the big hit, an open pattern corresponding to the big hit type is selected from the open pattern table 202aa and set as the open pattern of the first round. By defining the opening pattern (start timing of the opening / closing operation) in the opening pattern table 202aa in advance, the opening / closing door 650f1 can be opened / closed with the same opening pattern in each big hit.

  Next, details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 79”, “big hit A6” Are defined in association with each other (see 202b1 in FIG. 83). The “big hit A6” has 16 rounds, and an open pattern in which a V prize can be won in the first round of the big hit (a game ball can be made to enter the right specific winning opening 650a at a rate of about 80%). Open pattern) is a jackpot type to be set. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value (random number value) associated with “big hit A6” is 80 “0 to 79”, The rate at which "big hit A6" is determined in the case of a big hit is 80% (80/100).

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "big hit" for the range of "80 to 99". B6 "is defined in association (see 202b2 in FIG. 83). The “big hit B6” has 16 rounds, and has an opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a V in the first round of the jackpot (an opening pattern in which it is almost impossible for game balls to enter the right specific winning opening 650a). It is the jackpot type to be set. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter values (random values) associated with “big hit B6” are 20 values of “80 to 99”, The rate at which “big hit B6” is determined in the case of a big hit is 20% (20/100).

  In the sixth embodiment, the jackpot type in which the open pattern in which the V winning is difficult is set is provided. However, it is not always necessary to provide the open pattern in which the V winning is difficult. For example, instead of a configuration in which an open pattern capable of winning a V prize is always set when a big hit occurs, the rate at which the probability change state is set after the end of the big hit is reduced by reducing the rate of the V prize, as in the sixth embodiment. You may adjust so that it becomes. With this configuration, the number of open patterns can be reduced, so that the data amount of the open pattern table 202aa can be reduced.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 84, the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-described fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 8) in that a certain-variable setting flag 203aa and a certain-variable The difference is that a counter 203ab, a winning number counter 203ac, a remaining ball timer flag 203ad, a remaining ball timer 203ae, a positive change enable flag 203ag, a positive change enable timer 203ah, and a discharge number counter 203af are added. I have.

  The probability change setting flag 203aa is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the jackpot game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probable change state is determined by whether or not a gaming ball has entered the right specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot game. Here, inside the right variable winning device 650, a positive change switch 650e (not shown) is disposed at a position where a game ball that has entered from the right specific winning opening 650a always passes. When the output of the probability change switch 650e is turned on, it is determined that the game ball has entered the right specific winning opening 650a, and the probability change setting flag 203aa is set to ON (S1305 in FIG. 88, FIG. 89). S1410). On the other hand, the probability change setting flag 203aa is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1205 in FIG. 87). The probability change setting flag 203aa is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

  If the probability change setting flag 203aa is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability change switch 650e before the power-off is cut off, and it can be determined that the game ball has passed. Only in such a case, the probable change setting flag 203aa may be officially set to ON and the process may return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the power has passed through the certainty switch 650e before the power is turned off, based on whether or not a certainty variable counter 203ab, which will be described later, has a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to judge whether the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203aa in the state where the power is turned off, and reduce damage to the hole.

  The probability change passage counter 203ab is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability change switch 650e after the end of one round of the jackpot game (one round of the jackpot in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the right specific winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 in the first round have been ejected, based on the sum of the probable variable passage counter 203ab and the ejection number counter 203af described later. . The probability change passage counter 203ab is updated by incrementing the value by one every time the passage of the probability change switch 650e is detected in a predetermined period (a so-called ball throwing period) after one round is completed (FIG. 89). S1409). In addition, after executing the process of determining whether the number of game balls winning the right specific winning opening 650a matches the number of discharged balls, the number is reset to the initial value “0” (S1415 in FIG. 89). Note that the probability change passage counter 203ab is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203ac is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the right specific winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 in each round of the jackpot game. . More specifically, it is determined that the game ball has passed through the entering ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65 or the above-described probable changing switch 650e provided in the right variable winning device 650. Based on this, it is updated by being added one by one (S1303 in FIG. 88). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650 (the total value of the winning number counter 203ac and the positive variable passing counter 203ab) and the number of discharged coins ( After it is determined whether or not the value is equal to the value of the number-of-discharges counter 203af), the initial value is reset to “0” (see S1415 in FIG. 89). The value of the winning number counter 203ac is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203ad indicates that if a game ball remains inside the variable prize device 65 or the right variable prize device 650 at the end of the round, the ball for discharging the remaining game ball is This is a flag indicating whether or not the current period is an active period. When the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to ON, it means that the ball is in a ball-running period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203ae described later is incremented by one and updated (see S1405 in FIG. 89).

  The remaining ball timer 203ae determines that the game ball has remained inside the variable prize device 65 or the right variable prize device 650 at the time when the specific prize port 65a or the right specific prize port 650a is closed after one round. In this case, it is a counter for determining whether or not the time necessary for discharging the remaining game balls has elapsed. The time required until the game ball is discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in the sixth embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203ae. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203ae (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 matches the number of discharged coins. It is determined whether or not there is (S1411 in FIG. 89). If they do not match, an error command is set and that effect is reported. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650. Further, it is possible to illegally leave the game balls in the right variable winning device 650 and suppress the illegal act of causing the game balls to flow down to the positive change switch 65e at the timing of the first round of the jackpot.

  If the winning number does not match the discharge number, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the certain change setting flag 203aa is set even if the game ball passes through the certain change switch 650e. It may be configured not to be turned on. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress improper assignment of the probable change state.

  The number-of-discharges counter 203af is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged to the outside from the variable prize device 65 or the right variable prize device 650 in each round of the jackpot. The discharge number counter 203af is provided at a ball discharge port through which a game ball passes through a ball discharge port for discharging a game ball from each variable prize device (variable prize device 65 or right variable prize device 650). Each time the ball discharge port switch is turned on by the passage of a game ball), the value is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1403 in FIG. 89). After it is determined that the number of winning balls in the device 650 matches the number of ejected balls, the number is reset to an initial value of 0 (S1414 in FIG. 89).

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the big hit control process 7 (S921) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This jackpot control process 7 (S921) is executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 29) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30, S904) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is the process to be performed.

  Among the jackpot control processes 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, in the respective processes of S1001 to S1004 and S1009 to S1011, the jackpot control processes in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (FIG. 30) are respectively performed. The same processes as those of S1001 to S1004 and S1009 to S1011 of the reference) are executed. In the big hit control process 7 (see FIG. 85) according to the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the start timing of a new round is determined in the process of S1004 (S1004: Yes), the release according to the round and the big hit type is performed. A jackpot operation setting process for setting an operation is executed (S1021), and this process ends. The details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1021) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the big hit control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011 Yes), the game state after the end of the big hit is set. Is executed (S1022), and this process ends. The details of the jackpot ending process (S1022) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the big hit control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: No), the specific winning opening 65a and the right specification A prize-winning process for performing a process according to the prize-winning opening 650a is executed (S1023). The details of the winning process (S1023) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the winning process (S1023) is completed, an abnormal process is performed to determine whether the game ball that has entered the specific winning port 65a and the right specific winning port 650a has been normally discharged (S1024). This processing ends. The details of this abnormal processing (S1024) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, details of the above-described jackpot operation setting process (S1021) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1021). The jackpot operation setting process (S1021) is a process for setting an opening operation according to the round and the jackpot type as described above.

  In the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 86), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round (S1101). ), The opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1102), and the process proceeds to S1105.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1101 that it is the start timing of the first round (S1101: Yes), the release pattern corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from the release pattern table 202aa (S1103). In the process of S1103, if the current jackpot type is the jackpot A6, the open pattern (see FIG. 80 (a)) capable of winning a V is read, whereas if the current jackpot type is the jackpot B6, it is difficult to win the V. Read out the open pattern (see FIG. 80 (b)).

  When the process of S1103 ends, the start of the release pattern read in the process of S1103 is set (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1105. In the processing of S1105 executed after the processing of S1102 or S1104, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1105), and this processing ends. By executing the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 86), the right specific winning opening 650a can be controlled to open and close in an appropriate opening pattern according to the jackpot type.

  Next, the details of the jackpot ending process (S1022) will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit end process (S1022) is a process for setting the game state after the big hit end, as described above. In the jackpot ending processing (S1022), first, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203aa is on (S1201). If it is determined that the probable change setting flag 203aa is off (S1201: No), the current time is determined. This means that no gaming ball has entered (wins) the right specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot, so that by setting 100 to the value of the counter 203f during the time saving, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot Is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1204.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the probability change setting flag 203aa is ON (S1201: Yes), it means that a game ball has entered the right specific winning opening 650a during the current jackpot. By setting the probability change flag 203e to ON, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

  In the processing of S1204 executed after the processing of S1202 or S1203, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the state after the jackpot set by the processing of S1202 or S1203 is set (S1204). The probable change setting flag 203aa is set to off (S1205), and the process ends. By executing the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 87), an appropriate gaming state can be set according to the state of the probability change setting flag 203aa.

  Next, details of the winning process (S1023) will be described with reference to FIG. The winning process (S1023) is a process for performing a process according to winning in the specific winning opening 65a and the right specific winning opening 650a as described above. In the winning process (S1023), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is a round valid period (S1301). Here, the round effective period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a or the right specific winning opening 650a to the end of the interval period. In the processing of S1301, if it is not the round validity period (S1301: No), this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the current time is the round validity period (S1301: Yes), then winning in one of the specific winning openings (specific winning opening 65a or right specific winning opening 650a) is performed. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (S1302). If it is determined that a winning in the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or right specific winning opening 650a) has not been detected (S1302: No), the process proceeds to S1306. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that a winning for the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or right specific winning opening 650a) has been detected (S1302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203ac and updated (S1303). ). Next, it is determined whether or not this round is the first round (S1304). If it is determined that the current round is the first round (S1304: Yes), the right specific winning opening 650a is set in the first round of the jackpot. Since it means that the ball has been entered (winning), the probability change setting flag 203aa is set to ON (S1305), and the process shifts to S1306. On the other hand, in the process of S1304, if it is determined that the current round is not the first round (S1304: No), the process of S1305 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1306.

  In the process of S1306, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203ac is equal to or greater than 10 (S1306). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203ac is equal to or greater than 10 (S1306: Yes), the process proceeds to S1308, and the end of the current round is set. On the other hand, in the processing of S1306, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203ac is less than 10 (S1306: No), it is next determined whether or not the round time has elapsed (S1307), and the round time is determined. If the time has elapsed (S1307: Yes), the process proceeds to S1308, and the end of the current round is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round period has not elapsed (S1307: No), there is no need to end the round, so this processing is ended as it is. In the processing of S1307, if the current round is the first round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if the end timing of the set opening pattern has come, while if the current time is the second round or later, If 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed.

  In the processing of S1308, the closing of the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or the right specific winning opening 650a) is set (S1308), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning opening has been closed is set (S1309). Next, by setting the remaining ball timer flag 203ad to ON, a ball throwing period is set (S1310), and this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the abnormality processing (S1024) will be described with reference to FIG. The abnormal process (S1024) is a process for determining whether or not the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and the right specific winning opening 650a has been normally discharged, as described above. In this abnormal process (S1024), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the round valid period (S1401). If the current time is not the round valid period (S1401: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the round valid period (S1401: Yes), then, whether the game ball has passed the ball outlet switch (the game ball is discharged from the outlet for discharging the game ball from each variable winning device). (S1402).

  In the processing of S1402, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge switch (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203af (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

  In the processing of S1404, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is on (S1404), and if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is off (S1404: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1404 that the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is on (S1404: Yes), it means that the ball is currently being thrown, and the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is set to 1 Is added and updated (S1405). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is the upper limit value (that is, whether or not it is the end timing of the ball throwing period (0.8 seconds after the end of the round)) (S1406). If it is determined that the value of 203ae is not the upper limit value (it is not the end timing of the ball throwing period) (S1406: No), it is determined whether or not the current is the ball throwing period after the end of the first round. (S1407) When it is determined that the ball flinging period has elapsed after the completion of one round (S1407: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a game ball has passed the certainty changing switch 650e (S1408). When it is determined that the game ball has not passed through 650e (S1408: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1408, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the probability change switch 650e (S1408: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203ab (S1409), and the probability change setting flag 203aa is set to ON. Then (S1410), the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1407, when it is determined that the current ball throwing period is the ball throwing period after the second and subsequent rounds are completed (S1407: No), each of the steps S1408 to S1410 is performed. The process is skipped and the process ends.

  Further, in the processing of S1406, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is the upper limit value (it is the end timing of the ball throwing period) (S1406: Yes), then, the discharge number (discharge number counter 203af) Value) (S1411).

  In the processing of S1411, if it is determined that the number of discharged papers and the number of winnings do not match (S1411: No), an error command is set (S1412), and the processing shifts to the processing of S1413. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of passing the game ball through the probable change switch 650e3 while the right specific winning opening 650a is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1411 that the number of discharges and the number of winnings match (S1411: Yes), the processing of S1412 is skipped, and the flow proceeds to the processing of S1413. In the process of S1413, the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to off (S1413), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is reset (S1414). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203ac, the number-of-discharge counter 203af, and the value of the certainty passing counter 203ab are reset (S1415), and the process ends.

  By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 89), the ball is clogged inside each of the variable winning devices (variable winning device 65 and right variable winning device 650), and the like, so that each specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a). , And the occurrence of a problem that a game ball that has entered the right variable winning device 650a) is not discharged properly can be detected and notified at an early stage.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, a bonus (prize ball) is given to a player by a game ball entering during execution of a jackpot game (during a special game state). Two types of winning devices, a variable winning device 65 and a right variable winning device 650, are provided. The right specific winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 is set to an open state in which a ball can be entered in the first round of the jackpot, and when a game ball enters during the jackpot, in addition to the prize ball, a special after the jackpot is completed. A symbol change state is given. Therefore, depending on whether or not a game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a, whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot is advantageous to the player changes, so that the right specific winning opening 650a in the first round of the jackpot. The game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters.

  The right specific winning opening 650a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach even when the player hits the ball left or right, and when the player continues to hit the player left in the first round, the right specific winning opening 650a is provided. The number of game balls reaching the right variable winning device 650 while the ball 650a can enter is increased, but the ratio of the reached game balls entering the right specific winning opening 650a is reduced. . On the other hand, when the right-handed player keeps hitting right in the first round, the number of game balls reaching the right variable winning device 650 while the right specific winning opening 650a is allowed to enter is reduced, but the reached game is reached. The configuration is such that the ratio of the ball entering the right specific winning opening 650a increases. That is, the number of game balls reaching the right variable winning device 650 during a predetermined period (a period until the opening pattern of one round ends) (the number of opportunities to win the right specific winning opening 650a) ( Element) is configured such that left-handing is more advantageous than right-handing. In addition, the surface (element) of the ease of entering the ball (ball entry rate) with respect to the right variable winning device 650 is configured so that right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed. Because of these, the gaming ability in the first round of the jackpot can be made different depending on the launch direction of the game ball, and therefore, for each player, the desired gaming ability (the ball entry rate to the right specific winning opening 650a is low) Instead, it is possible to select one of a game property in which the number of game balls to be reached increases, and a game property in which the ball entry rate increases instead of the small number of games reached. As a result, it is possible to realize a gaming property that matches the tastes of more players, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the predetermined period of the jackpot (the first round), the right-handed player is more advantageous in terms of the ball entry rate than the left-handed player (right). The game balls that have reached the variable prize device 650a can easily enter the right specific winning opening 650a). On the other hand, when the player hits left, the number of reached balls becomes smaller than when the player hits right. This configuration is advantageous in terms of surface (more game balls are more likely to reach the right variable winning device 650a). Thereby, by making a configuration in which the advantageous side and the disadvantageous side are different between right-handed and left-handed, the player can determine whether to perform right-handed or left-handed. , But the difference between right-handed and left-handed advantage is not limited to this. For example, at a position where a game ball easily enters when left-handed (it is difficult to enter when right-handed), the opening time is short (for example, up to one second), but the game ball is detected to be entered. A special winning port is provided when there are many prize balls (for example, 15 per ball entry) when the player hits the ball, and the game ball easily enters when the player hits the ball right (the ball is difficult to enter when the player hits the ball left) A specific winning hole may be provided at the position (a) at which the opening time is long (for example, 5 seconds at the maximum), but a small number of prize balls are provided (for example, three per winning ball). The specific winning opening to be opened may be alternately switched for each round, and the interval between rounds may be extremely short (for example, set to 0.1 second). With this configuration, the number of game balls entering the specific winning opening is likely to be reduced when the left hit is continued during the jackpot, but is provided when the player enters the specific winning opening. It is possible to realize a gaming property in which award balls increase. On the other hand, if the player continues to hit the right during the jackpot, more game balls are likely to enter the specific winning opening, but less prize balls are awarded when entering the specific winning opening. Nature can be realized. Therefore, it is possible for the player to select a desired game property and play the game. Also, for example, a variable winning device 65 is provided at a position where a game ball can easily enter when left-handed (it is difficult to enter when right-handed), and a game ball can be entered when right-handed. The variable right prize device 650 is provided at a position where the ball can be easily balled (it is difficult to enter the ball if the player hits the ball left), and the variable prize device 65 is opened during the period in which the right variable prize device 650 is opened in one jackpot. May be configured to be shorter than the predetermined period. In other words, if the player continues to make a right hit at the jackpot of 1, the possibility that the ball will enter the right specific winning opening 650a and the probability change state will be given after the jackpot is increased, while the obtained prize balls are reduced, If left hitting is continued, a large number of game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. On the other hand, it becomes difficult to enter the right specific winning opening 650a. The game state after the big hit may be disadvantageous. Also in the case of such a configuration, the superiority can be made different for each firing direction during the jackpot, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In this case, in this case, the variable prize device 65 (variable prize device in which only a prize ball is awarded for entering) and the right variable prize device 650 (in which a prize ball is awarded for a winning ball and a positive change state) May be reversed. In addition, the setting of the surface (element) in which right-handing is more advantageous and the surface (element) in which left-handing is more advantageous are not limited to the first round of the jackpot. For example, during a normal game, there may be provided an element in which left-handing is more advantageous than right-handing and an element in which right-handing is more advantageous than left-handing. More specifically, for example, a configuration is provided in which a left entrance where a game ball fired with a left hit can enter, and a right entrance where a game ball fired with a right strike can enter, When a game ball enters one of the entrances, a lottery of a special symbol is executed. And, in the time-saving state of a normal symbol, by playing a game aiming at the right entrance with a right strike, it is more advantageous in terms of game efficiency than a left strike, while a left strike gives an advantage in terms of game efficiency. Although it is disadvantageous than right-handed, if the jackpot is won, the jackpot type (the type that is advantageous in terms of the number of rounds or the continuation rate of the advantageous state) that is more advantageous than right-handed may be easily selected. Good.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the predetermined period of the jackpot (first round), when the player hits right, the game ball that has reached the right variable prize device 650a is identified as compared to the case where the player hits the left. On the other hand, when the player hits the ball leftward, more game balls are more likely to reach the right variable winning device 650a than when the player hits the ball rightward. Had a configuration. In addition to this, the game board 13 may be provided with a sensor or the like capable of detecting the firing direction of the game ball in the first round of the jackpot. And it is good also as a structure which performs the corresponding effect according to the firing direction detected by the sensor. More specifically, for example, when a left strike is detected, the first round display mode (see FIG. 82) is a display mode in which the display area HR2 is turned on and the display area HR3 is turned off. In the case where a right strike is detected, the display area HR3 may be turned on, and the display area HR2 may be set to have a visual display mode in which the display area HR2 is turned off. With this configuration, the player can more easily understand the playability selected by the accident.

  In the sixth embodiment, by opening and closing the opening / closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 by sliding it to the left in front view, the game that rolls from the right side with respect to the right variable winning device 650. The ball is configured so that the period during which the ball can enter is longer than the game ball rolling from the left side, but the shape and operation content of the opening / closing door 650f1 are not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing door 650f1 may be configured to be opened from the near side in front view to the far side. Then, the length of the opening / closing door 650f1 on the right front side in front view may be configured to be one game ball or more and shorter than the length on the left front side in front view. That is, when the opening / closing door 650f1 is stored on the back side in the front view, the right side of the opening / closing door 650f1 can enter the game ball earlier than the left side, and the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed. When the opening / closing door 650f1 projects forward and forward, the left side of the opening / closing door 650f1 may be in a state in which a game ball can be supplied earlier. Also in the case of such a configuration, similarly to the above-described sixth embodiment, the game ball rolling from the right with respect to the right variable winning device 650 is more likely to enter than the game ball rolling from the left. It can be configured so that the possible period is long.

  In the sixth embodiment, a game surface that reaches the right variable winning device 650 physically enters the right specific winning opening 650a when the game ball reaching the right variable winning device 650 physically enters the surface where the left-handing is more advantageous than the right-handing due to the board configuration. And the surface where right-handing is more advantageous than left-handing (ie, the number of game balls that can reach the right variable winning device 650 during one round) is provided. It is not limited. For example, control may be realized. More specifically, for example, the right specific winning opening 650a is provided at a position where the reaching ratio of the game ball is the same regardless of whether the player strikes right or left. Then, in the first round of the jackpot, it is configured to be able to detect whether the player has made a right-handed or left-handed hit, and it is detected that the player has made a right-handed and that the player has made a left-handed The configuration may be such that the opening pattern is different from the case in which the opening is performed. In other words, when the right-handed winning opening 650a is detected, a right-handed winning opening 650a is opened in a relatively long opening pattern although the number of times of opening the right specific winning opening 650a is small, while the left-handed is detected. In this case, the right specific winning opening 650a may be opened in an opening pattern in which the opening period of each opening is relatively short while the number of times of opening the right specific winning opening 650a is relatively large. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the player can select the jackpot gambling property by operating an operation means such as a button instead of the firing direction of the game ball.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described fifth embodiment, all game balls fired by right-handing are configured to pass through the bypass accessory 700. That is, when the player hits right, the player always takes 7 to 8 seconds to flow down to the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are provided). And had That is, in a normal game state other than the execution of the jackpot game, the game efficiency is deteriorated when right-handed is performed.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, two types of flow paths are provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and when flowing down one of the flow paths, the flow path passes through the detour role 700 as in the fifth embodiment. When the game ball flows down to the variable prize device 65, but flows down the other flow path, the ball does not enter the detour role 700, and the ball does not easily enter the specific winning opening 65a. And That is, a flow path in which the period until the game ball enters one of the entrances (the first entrance 64, the specific winning opening 65, the out opening 66, the general winning opening 63, etc.) is relatively long, Two types of channels are provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, namely, a channel having a relatively short period until the ball enters one of the entrances. Thereby, the playability is made different depending on the launch direction of the game ball during the jackpot (some wasteful balls may be generated, but the gameplay ability to quickly digest the jackpot and the useless balls are unlikely to occur) In addition, it is possible to prevent the game efficiency from deteriorating when a right-handed game is played, while allowing the player to select a game with a longer jackpot duration.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and that the pachinko machine 10 is provided in the main control device 110. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. It is. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the fifth section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fifth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90, in the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment, a game ball can flow down to the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view and to the left side of the bypassable object 700 in a front view. It differs from the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment in that a flow path is provided. Further, the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the electric accessory 64a provided along with the first entrance 64 is deleted. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the flow path in which the detour accessory 700 is provided is referred to as a right first flow path, and the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view, and the detour accessory 700. The channel provided on the left side in front view is referred to as a right second channel.

  As shown in FIG. 90, a normal entrance (through gate) 67 through which a game ball can pass is provided above the right second flow path, and the game ball passes through the normal entrance 67. Thereby, similarly to the fifth embodiment and the like, the lottery of the ordinary symbols is executed. As shown in FIG. 90, the normal entrance 67 is given the letters "GO". Below the normal ball entrance 67, a second ball entrance 640 through which game balls can enter is provided. When a game ball enters the second entrance 640, a lottery of a special symbol is executed in the same manner as when a game ball enters the first entrance 64. It should be noted that a special symbol lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) that is executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 and a ball that enters the second entrance 640 are executed. In the special symbol lottery to be performed (the second special symbol lottery), the rate of winning the jackpot is the same regardless of the state (whether the special symbol is in a low probability state or the special symbol is in a probable state). It is configured to be. On the other hand, the jackpot type determined in the case of a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is different between the case of the jackpot by the lottery of the first special symbol and that of the jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol. (See FIG. 92A). More specifically, the jackpot type of a larger number of rounds is more easily determined when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol than in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured. Thereby, a player who has a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol can have a greater joy to the player than a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a capable of performing an opening operation in the right direction when viewed from the front. While the electric accessory 640a is closed (vertically upright), the game ball that has flowed into the right second flow path cannot enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, while the electric accessory 640a is open (in a state of being inclined rightward in front view), most of the game balls flowing into the second right flow path enter the second entrance 640. Ball becomes possible. The electric accessory 640a changes to an open state under the same conditions as the electric accessory 64a of the fifth embodiment and the like. More specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, when the winning of the ordinary symbol is won, the opening period of “0.2 seconds × 1 time” and the number of times of opening are set, while the ordinary symbol is set. In the time-saving state, when an ordinary symbol is won by lottery, an opening period of “1 second × 2 times” and the number of times of opening are set. In addition, as in the fifth embodiment and the like, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is 30 seconds, while in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is 3 seconds. Very short. Therefore, when the game method of firing the game ball aiming at the right second flow path in the normal state of the normal symbol is performed, the game ball can hardly enter the second entrance 640 (the game ball is wasted). On the other hand, in the time-saving state of a normal symbol, the game method of firing a game ball aiming at the right second flow path frequently (the number of game balls fired and the second ball entry) A game ball can be made to enter the second entrance 640 (to the extent that the number of prize balls paid out by entering the opening 640 becomes substantially equal). Therefore, in the gaming state in which the normal symbol time reduction state is set (special symbol change state and normal symbol time reduction state, or special symbol low probability state and normal symbol time reduction state), the second right By continuing to launch the game ball aiming at the flow path, it is easy to determine the jackpot type (jacket type with a relatively large number of rounds) that is advantageous in the event of a jackpot. It can be executed continuously without reduction. On the other hand, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, most of the game balls are wasted even if aiming at the right second flow path, so that the game ball is shot by aiming at the first entrance 64 by left hitting. Need to play games. Even if a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, an unfavorable jackpot type (a jackpot type having a relatively small number of rounds) is easily determined, and the number of possessed balls decreases as the left-handed player keeps hitting. For this reason, a game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set will be stronger.

  Further, an out port 66 is provided below the second entrance 640. When a game ball enters the out port 66, the game ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 without providing a prize ball. The out port 66 can prevent the game ball from being clogged in the right second channel. In addition, as shown in FIG. 90, the right second flow path is provided with a game until the game ball enters one of the entrances (the second entrance 640 or the out 66). There is almost no configuration that prevents the ball from flowing down (changing the traveling direction or reducing the speed). Therefore, as compared with the right first flow path, the period from the launch of the game ball to the entry into any one of the entrances is extremely short (for example, about 1 second). Therefore, the game can be efficiently performed by firing the game ball aiming at the right second flow path.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, in addition to the right first flow path provided with the detour accessory 700 on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the normal entrance 67 and the second entrance A right second flow path provided with 640 is provided. The second entrance 640 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball (the electric accessory 640a is easily opened) during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. And, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, it is possible to make a right strike. That is, even in the presence of the detouring object 700, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of switching the direction in which the game ball is fired according to the game state during the normal game (a game state other than the jackpot game).

  Next, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 shows a display state in a game state in which a normal symbol time reduction state is set (a special symbol positive change state, a normal symbol time reduction state, a special symbol low probability state, and a normal symbol time reduction state). It is a figure showing an example. As shown in FIG. 91, when the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is set, the upper side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front (above the display area where the variation display of the third symbol is executed) ), A horizontally long display area HR8 having a substantially rectangular shape is formed. For this display area HR8, as shown in FIG. 91, “Aim at“ GO ”by right-handing! ! "And an image imitating a right-pointing arrow are displayed. According to these display contents, by right-hitting the game ball at the firing intensity (firing speed) passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 with the character “GO” attached to the player, It can be easily understood that a game ball can be made to enter the second entrance 640.

  In the seventh embodiment, the game ball is fired at a firing strength of 85% to 100% (that is, by rotating the operation handle 51 to a position within 85% to 100% of the movable range of the operation handle 51), and the The game ball can flow into the first flow path, and is fired at a firing intensity of 60% to 90% (that is, the ball is rotated to a position of 60% to 90% of the movable range of the operation handle 51). This allows the game ball to flow into the second right flow path. Here, when the game ball is fired in the range of the firing intensity of 85% to 90%, it is possible to flow into the right first channel and the right second channel depending on the rebound direction of the game ball and the like. There is. In addition, when the game ball is fired at a firing intensity of 60% to 65%, there is a possibility that the game ball flows into the right second channel and a case where the game ball flows into the left channel of the variable display device unit 80. . On the other hand, when the game ball is fired within the range of the firing intensity of 91% to 100%, the game ball flows into the right first channel almost certainly. Also, when a game ball is fired within the range of the firing intensity of 66% to 84%, the game ball flows into the right second flow path almost certainly. When a game ball is fired with a firing intensity of 25% to 59%, the game ball flows into the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 almost certainly. When a game ball is fired with a firing intensity of less than 25%, the game ball cannot be launched into the game area because the game ball cannot cross the return ball prevention member 68.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a first hit type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. Only the specified contents of the table 202b are partially changed. As shown in FIG. 92 (a), the first hit type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment indicates that the lottery when the jackpot is won is the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol. Different jackpot types are defined depending on whether they are present.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), among the jackpots by the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4”, the jackpot type is “Big hit A7” is defined in association (see 202b1 in FIG. 92A). The "big hit A7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the special symbol positive change state and the normal symbol time saving state. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the five counter values (random values) associated with “big hit A7” are “0 to 4”. The rate (probability) at which "big hit A7" is determined when a special symbol is won by lottery is 5% (5/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), among the jackpots by the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is “5 to 59”, the “big hit B7” (See 202b2 in FIG. 92 (a)). The "big hit B7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is eight, and the game state after the big hit is set to the special symbol positive change state and the normal symbol time saving state. In other words, although the number of rounds is smaller than "big hit A7", the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous gaming state, so that the big hit type is relatively advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random value) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value (random value) associated with “big hit B7” is 55 “5 to 59”, so the first The rate (probability) at which “big hit B7” is determined when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit is 55% (55/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), among the jackpots by lottery of the first special symbol, if the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is "60 to 99", the "big hit C7" (See 202b3 in FIG. 92 (a)). The “big hit C7” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is eight and the game state after the big hit is set to a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol. That is, since the number of rounds is the smallest and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is also relatively disadvantageous, the "big hit C7" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter values (random values) associated with “big hit C7” are 40 “60 to 99”. The rate (probability) at which “big hit C7” is determined in the event of a big hit in a special symbol lottery is 40% (40/100).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), among the jackpots obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 59”, the “big hit D7” (See 202b4 in FIG. 92 (a)). The “big hit D7” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to the special symbol positive change state and the normal symbol time saving state. That is, similar to the "big hit A7", the big hit type that is most advantageous to the player in terms of the number of rounds and the game state after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value (random number value) associated with “big hit D7” is 60 “0 to 59”. The rate (probability) of determining “big hit D7” when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit is 60% (60/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), among the jackpots by the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is “60 to 99”, “big hit E7” (See 202b5 in FIG. 92 (a)). This “big hit E7” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 and the game state after the big hit is set to the special symbol low probability state and the normal symbol time saving state. That is, although the number of rounds is the largest, the gaming state after the jackpot is a jackpot type set to a relatively disadvantageous gaming state. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter values (random values) associated with “big hit E7” are 40 “60 to 99”, so the first The rate (probability) at which “big hit E7” is determined in the event of a special symbol lottery being a big hit is 40% (40/100).

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot (the jackpot B7 and the jackpot C7) of eight rounds (a relatively small number of rounds) is generated at a rate of 95%. ) Is determined, and only at a rate of 5%, a jackpot (jackpot A7) of 16 rounds (relatively large number of rounds) is determined. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot (any one of the jackpot D7 and the jackpot E7) of 16 rounds (a relatively large number of rounds) is determined at a rate of 100%. I have. This makes it easier to determine the number of rounds in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery than in the second special symbol lottery. In this case, the player can have a greater sense of expectation.

  The method of making the jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol more advantageous than the jackpot by the lottery of the first special symbol is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds, the rate at which the jackpot type in which the special symbol is in the probable change state after the end of the jackpot may be determined such that the jackpot by the second special symbol lottery is higher. Good. Also, for example, as the number of times reduced in the case of a normal jackpot, the number of times reduced in the second special symbol with more jackpots may be easily selected.

  Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 8) in that a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is provided. In place of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a2, and in place of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a first special symbol holding ball is provided. The difference is that a number counter 203c1 and a second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c2 are provided.

  The first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a1 is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the first entrance 64, and the second special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a2 is This is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the second entrance 640. The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a2 have the same configuration as the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment). I have. That is, it has four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3. Are stored respectively. When the special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are shifted to the execution area (see FIG. 11) ( Is moved), and based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed. On the other hand, when each counter value is not stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 (when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is 0), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1. Are shifted (moved) to the execution area (see FIG. 11), and the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area are stored. , A determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made. That is, in the seventh embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the lottery of the first special symbol.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 enters the second entrance 640. The maximum number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the (start winning) is 4 It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is set to zero. One is added at a time (see S424 in FIG. 94). On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S228 in FIG. 93). The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value becomes four. It is incremented by one (see S430 in FIG. 94). On the other hand, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203c2 is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S223 in FIG. 93).

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the special symbol variation processing 8 (S121) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol change process 8 (S121) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) instead of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 22) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment). In the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the process is a process for setting the variation display on the first symbol display device 37 and the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81. is there.

  In the special symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 93) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S201, S202, and S208 to S217, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 93) in the fifth embodiment (first embodiment) is performed. 22), the same processes as those of S201, S202, and S208 to S217 are executed. In the special symbol change process 8 (see FIG. 93) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S202 that the special symbol is not changing (S202: No), the number of the second special symbol reserved balls is determined. The value (N2) of the counter 203c2 is acquired (S221), and it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is larger than 0 (S222).

  In the process of S222, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203c2 is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S222: Yes), then the second special symbol holding is performed. The value is updated by subtracting 1 from the value (N2) of the ball counter 203c2 (S223), and a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the updated value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is set (S224). . The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S224, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the first area in the hold → the execution area, the second area in the hold → the first area in the hold, the third area in the area → the second area in the hold, the fourth area in the area → the third area in the hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process shifts to S208.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is not a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (that is, 0) (S222: No). Then, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is acquired (S226), and whether or not the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is larger than 0 is determined. Is determined (S227).

  In the process of S227, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is not a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (that is, it is 0) (S227: No), Since neither the reserved ball of the first special symbol nor the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists, which means that the variable display of the special symbol cannot be newly started, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S227, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S227: Yes), then the first special The value is updated by subtracting 1 from the value (N1) of the symbol holding ball counter 203c1 (S228), and a special figure 1 holding ball number command indicating the updated value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203c1 is set (S228). S229). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and is the same as the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, and is used in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. In the external output process (S901), it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  After the special figure 1 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S229, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is shifted by the same method as the processing of S225 (S230), and the processing is performed. The process moves to S208.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, details of the start winning processing 8 (S122) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This start winning process 8 (S122) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) instead of the start winning process (see FIG. 24) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for executing the corresponding control when the ball entry to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is detected.

  In this start winning process 8 (S122), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won (start win) the first entrance 64 (S421). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. In the process of S421, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first entrance 64 (S421: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol) Of the variable display to be held N1) is acquired (S422). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S423).

  In the processing of S421, when it is determined that the first ball entrance 64 has not been won (S421: No), or even if there is a game ball winning in the first entrance 64, the processing of S423 is performed. If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S423: No), the process proceeds to S427. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S421: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is incremented by 1 (S424). Then, a special figure 1 reserved ball count command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c1 changed by the calculation is set (S425).

  The special figure 1 reserved sphere count command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output by the MPU 201 as an external output process of a main process (see FIG. 29) described later (S901). Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the special figure 1 pending sphere number command is set by the processing of S425, the first random number counter C1 and the first collision type counter C2 updated in the processing of S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) and the stop are performed. Each value of the type counter C3 is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 of the RAM 203 (S426), and the processing is performed in S427. Move to. In the process of S426, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the initial area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the initial area.

  In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won (starts winning) the second entrance 640 (S427). Also in this process, similarly to the process of S421, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the processing of S427, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second entrance 640 (S427: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (for the second special symbol lottery). The corresponding variable display hold count N2) is acquired (S428), and it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol hold ball count counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S428). S429).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S427: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is changed. If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S429: No), the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S427: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S429: Yes), the second special One is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203c2 (S430). Then, a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 changed by the calculation is set (S431).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 29) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure 2 reserved ball count command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c2 from the special figure 2 reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol in the RAM 223. It is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b.

  After the special figure 2 pending ball count command is set by the processing of S431, the first random number counter C1 and the first collision type counter C2 updated in the processing of S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) and the stop are performed. Each value of the type counter C3 is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 of the RAM 203 (S432), and the process proceeds to S433. Transition. In the process of S432, similarly to the process of S426, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c2 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the initial area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the initial area.

  In the process of S433, a pre-read process for pre-reading the success or failure is executed from various counter values acquired based on the winning start (S433), and this process ends. Details of the prefetching process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S433). In this pre-reading process (S433), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entry for the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 has been detected in the current startup winning process 8 (see FIG. 94). Then, if it is determined that a new ball has not been detected (S1501: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1501 that a new ball has been detected (S1501: Yes), then whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball has reached the upper limit (ie, 4)? It is determined whether or not it is the upper limit value (S1502). On the other hand, in the process of S1502, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S1502: No), various counter values acquired at the time of detecting the incoming ball (start winning process 8 (FIG. 94) Based on the various counter values stored in the process of S426 or S432 of the reference), whether the lottery in the special symbol is successful (whether a big hit or not), its stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit), A fluctuation pattern is predicted (S1503).

  When the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (the big hit type in the case of the big hit), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S1503, next, the predicted success or failure of the lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S1504), and the process ends.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio lamp in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts a winning / wrong, a stop type, and a fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the period until the passed game ball enters one of the entrances (the area below the game board 13) is located on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Is relatively long (requires 7 to 8 seconds) and the period until the passing game ball enters one of the entrances is relatively short. (About one second) and two right flow paths. By launching the game ball at the big hit at the right first flow path, the period until reaching the specific winning opening 65a becomes long as in the fifth embodiment described above (that is, until the big hit ends). However, the game ball can be made to enter (win) the specific winning opening 65a at a higher rate than when the gaming ball is shot aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by left-handing.

  Further, when the game ball is fired toward the right second flow path, the possibility of entering the specific winning opening 65a is almost zero, but is relatively short (1 second) Degree). Therefore, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol in which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is easily opened, the game ball is continuously fired toward the right second flow path (66% to 84%). By right-handing at the firing intensity), the lottery of the second special symbol can be continuously performed without substantially reducing the number of balls held. On the other hand, when the player hits the ball left, the possibility of entering the second entrance 640 is almost zero, but it is possible to enter the first entrance 64 and the specific winning opening 65a is also provided. You can enter the ball. In addition, the area below the game board 13 (the first ball entrance 64 and the specific winning opening 65) is shorter than the case where the game ball is fired toward the right first flow path (about 1 second to 2 seconds). (The provided area). Therefore, a player who wants to end the jackpot in a short period of time (to acquire many prize balls in a short time) can be caused to perform a left-handed hit. In addition, even in the normal state of the ordinary symbol in which the electric accessory 640a is hard to be opened, it is possible to play a game by aiming for the game ball to enter the first entrance 64 by left hitting. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the flow path through which the game ball flows can be changed according to the game state, the player's taste, and the like. Therefore, since the player can enjoy the pleasure of distinguishing the launch direction of the game ball, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the seventh embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right second flow path is configured to enter the second entrance 640 or the out entrance 66, but is not limited thereto. Absent. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a part of the game ball that has flowed into the right second flow path can reach the first ball entrance 64, the specific winning opening 65, or the like. Conversely, a configuration may be made such that a part of the game ball that has flowed into the right first flow path can reach the second entrance 640.

  In the seventh embodiment, the right first flow path that is easy to enter the specific winning opening 65a and is difficult to enter the second entrance opening 640, and the second entrance opening is difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a. Although the right second flow path that easily enters the ball 640 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, it is not limited to this. For example, a game ball that has flowed down the right second flow path can enter the first ball entrance 64, and the winning rate to the specific winning opening 65a is lower than when flowing down the right first flow path. You may comprise so that it may become. With this configuration, in both the case where the player plays a game by left-handing and the case where the player plays a game aiming at the right second flow path by right-handing, the game ball enters the first entrance 64 in normal times. Since it becomes possible to enter the ball, it is possible to fire the game ball in the firing direction desired by the player during the normal game. Further, for example, on the left side of the game board 13, the left first flow path that is easy to enter the specific winning opening 65a and is difficult to enter the first entrance opening 64, and the specific winning arrangement than the left first flow path. A configuration may be adopted in which a left second channel that is difficult to enter the ball 65a and that is easier to enter the first ball entry port 64 than the left first channel is provided.

  In the seventh embodiment, during the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, the effect of suggesting that the game ball is fired at the normal entrance 67 (see FIG. 91) is executed. In addition, in addition to this, when the player has left-handed despite the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set (for example, it is detected that the game ball has entered the first entrance 64). In such a case, an effect (warning effect) of a mode in which the game ball is more strongly requested to be aimed at the normal entrance 67 may be executed. Similarly, when it is detected that the player hits the ball in the normal state of the normal symbol (for example, when it is detected that the game ball passes through the normal entrance 67), the player hits the ball left. An effect (warning effect) of a mode strongly requested may be performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which the player continues playing the game with the wrong direction of launch of the game ball and the player loses.

<First Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, various modifications of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. First, a first modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described seventh embodiment, when a game ball flows down the first right channel, the winning rate with respect to the specific winning opening 65a is the highest, while the period until reaching the specific winning opening 65a is increased. Was. Further, when a game ball flows down the right second flow path, the game ball easily enters the second entrance port 640, but does not easily enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  On the other hand, in the first modified example, a game ball flowing down the right first flow path and a game ball flowing down the right second flow path can both reach the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, although details will be described later, by continuously right-handing during the execution of the jackpot game, the game ball flowing down the right first flow path and the game ball flowing down the right second flow path are separated. It is configured to reach the variable winning device 65 almost at the same time. As a result, during execution of the jackpot game, two game balls are awarded (entered) to the specific winning opening 65a, so that in each round, the number of game balls exceeding the maximum winning number of the specific winning opening 65a is exceeded. Can be easily won. More specifically, as described above, in each of the jackpot rounds, when the tenth prize for the specific winning opening 65a is detected, it is determined that the end condition of the round is satisfied, and the specific winning opening 65a is closed. . In this situation, if two game balls reach the specific winning opening 65a almost simultaneously with nine gaming balls already winning in the specific winning opening 65a, the specific winning is detected after detecting the tenth winning. By the time the mouth 65a is closed, the eleventh game ball that has arrived almost at the same time as the tenth game ball can also be awarded to the specific winning opening 65a. That is, in one round, prize balls for eleven winnings (prize balls for winning more than a specified number of times) can be obtained relatively easily. Therefore, the prize ball can be acquired beyond the original jackpot specification of the pachinko machine 10, so that the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to a first modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a front view of the game board 13 in the first modification. As shown in FIG. 96, in the game board 13 in the first modification, the right first flow path (the flow path formed on the rightmost side in the game board 13) has the detouring object in the seventh embodiment. Instead of 700, a plurality of nails are provided. With the plurality of nails, the flowing direction of the game ball can be switched a plurality of times. On the other hand, the right second flow path (the flow path formed between the variable display device unit 80 and the right first flow path) prevents the game balls from flowing down as compared to the right first flow path. There are few structures (to slow down). Therefore, when flowing down the right second flow path, the lower area (the first entrance port 64 or the variable opening area) of the game board 13 after the game ball is fired is more likely to flow down the right second flow path than when flowing down the right first flow path. The period until reaching the winning device 65 (the area where the winning device 65 is arranged) is shortened. More specifically, the period from when the game ball is fired to when it reaches the variable prize device 65 is lower when flowing down the second flow path than when flowing down the second flow path than when flowing down the second flow path. It is about 6 seconds shorter.

  In addition, a distribution member 850 that distributes the game ball to either the right first flow path or the right second flow path is provided above the right first flow path and the right second flow path. The game ball fired by the right strike always reaches the distribution member 850, and is distributed to any one of the flow paths (either the right first flow path or the right second flow path) by the distribution member 850. Can be As shown in FIG. 96, the distribution member 850 has two holding portions 850a and 850b that can receive and temporarily hold the flowing game balls. The sorting member 850 is basically in a state where one of the holding portions 850a and 850b faces upward and stands still, and the game ball fired by right-handing is received by the holding portion facing upward. FIG. 96 illustrates a situation where a game ball fired by a right strike is received while the holding unit 850a faces upward and stands still.

  When a game ball is received by any of the holding units 850a and 850b, gravity due to the weight of the game ball acts on the distribution member 850. As a result, when the game ball is received by the holding portion 850a, the distribution member 850 rotates counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 850c as a rotation axis, and the holding portion 850b faces upward. In this state, since the holding unit 850a forms a downward slant, the game ball held by the holding unit 850a falls in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. That is, it flows down the right second flow path. On the other hand, when the game ball is received by the holding unit 850b, the distribution member 850 rotates clockwise about the rotation shaft 850c as a rotation axis, and the holding unit 850a faces upward. In this state, since the holding portion 850b forms a downward slant, the game ball held by the holding portion 850b falls right below in the front view. That is, it flows down the right first flow path. For this reason, the distributing member 850 is in a state where a different holding unit is directed upward each time the game ball is distributed to any one of the flow paths. Therefore, each time the game ball reaches the distribution member 650, the game ball can be alternately distributed to the right first flow path and the right second flow path.

  As described above, when flowing down the right second flow path, the time required to reach the variable winning device 65 is shorter by about 0.6 seconds when flowing down the right first flow path. And, as described above, the firing interval of the game balls is configured to be 0.6 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, when the player hits right continuously, one game ball distributed to the right first flow path and a game ball fired next to the one game ball and distributed to the right second flow path are separated. Arrives at the variable winning device 65 almost at the same time, and wins the specific winning opening 65a almost at the same time. For this reason, in each round of the jackpot, in a state where nine game balls have already been awarded to the specific winning opening 65a (a state in which the specific winning opening 65a is closed when another winning is detected), the right first flow is performed. When two game balls flowing down the road and the right second flow path reach the specific winning opening 65a almost at the same time, eleven game balls can be entered in one round. That is, simply continuing to right-hand continuously allows game balls to easily enter the specific winning opening 65a in excess of the upper limit of 10 winnings in each round of the jackpot (the winning number that is a condition for ending the round). A ball can be made (so-called over winning). Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be further improved.

  In the first modification, the game balls are alternately distributed to the right first flow path and the right second flow path by the distribution member 850 only by continuously striking the game balls to the right. It is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which the distribution member 850 is deleted, and the player himself / herself adjusts the firing intensity to aim for an over-winning prize. In this case, when the number of winnings for the specific winning opening 65 in each round becomes nine (the number of winnings is one less than the specified number), first, the game ball is fired aiming at the right first flow path, By firing a game ball aiming at the right second flow path, the game ball flowing down the right first flow path and the game ball flowing down the right second flow path reach the variable winning device 65 almost simultaneously. be able to. That is, the eleventh game ball can be awarded to the specific winning opening 65a from the time when the winning of the tenth gaming ball is detected until the time when the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Therefore, as compared with the first modification example described above, a technique for quickly switching the firing direction is required, but an over-winning can be more reliably generated for a player who switches the firing direction accurately. That is, in the first modified example described above, if the tenth game ball is not distributed to the right first channel in one round, an over-winning won't occur. That is, depending on the state of the distribution member 850 at the start of the round, whether or not the state is such that over-winning is easy is different. On the other hand, when the distribution member 850 is deleted, if the player has the technology of switching the firing direction, the tenth and eleventh game balls must be used as the right first flow path and the right second flow path. Since it can be made to flow down to the flow path, an over-winning prize can be generated more reliably.

<Second Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described seventh embodiment, when a game ball flows down the first right channel, the winning rate with respect to the specific winning opening 65a is the highest, while the period until reaching the specific winning opening 65a is increased. Was. Further, when a game ball flows down the right second flow path, the game ball easily enters the second entrance port 640, but does not easily enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  On the other hand, in the second modified example, a variable prize device 6500 is used as a variable prize device in which a prize ball is given when a game ball enters during a big hit, instead of the variable prize device 65 in the seventh embodiment. Is provided at a position where a game ball fired left-handed cannot enter the ball. The variable winning device 6500 is configured such that game balls flowing down the first right flow path and game balls flowing down the second right flow path can enter. The right first flow path is configured to have a longer period until reaching the variable prize winning device 6500 than the right second flow path, and while the variable prize winning device 6500 is open. , The ratio of entering the specific winning opening 6500a is increased. Thereby, in the big hit, different game characteristics can be realized when the game ball is fired aiming at the right first flow path and when the game ball is fired aiming at the right second flow path. That is, by continuously firing the game ball aiming at the right first flow path, the execution period of the jackpot game is prolonged, but it becomes difficult to generate a useless ball, while aiming at the right second flow path. By continuously firing the game ball, the execution period of the big hit game is shortened, but the game property is such that a useless ball can be generated.

  The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a front view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 97, in the second modification, the point that the variable winning device 65 is removed from the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 90) in the seventh embodiment, the lower part of the right second flow path is used. However, the only difference is that the variable winning device 6500 is provided between the right first flow path and the right second flow path.

  As shown in FIG. 97, the variable winning device 6500 gives a prize ball every time it detects a ball entering a specific winning port 6500a in which a game ball can enter. This variable winning device 6500 is provided with a pair of electric auditors 6500a1 and 6500a2 that can prevent game balls from entering. The electric accessory 6500a1 or 6500a2 is closed so that it is impossible to enter the specific winning opening 6500a at normal times. (Until 10 balls enter).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 97, when the electric accessory 6500a1 provided on the right first channel side is opened, the lower end of one induction channel (induction channel 780) inside the bypass accessory 700 is opened. And the tip of the electric accessory 6500a1 approach. That is, as a result that it becomes impossible for the game ball to pass between the guide channel 780 and the electric accessory 6500a1, the game ball flowing down the guide channel 780 almost certainly wins the specific winning opening 6500a.

  On the other hand, when the electric accessory 6500a2 provided on the right second flow path side is opened, a gap of one game ball or more is left on the left side of the tip (upper end) of the electric accessory 6500a. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the right second flow path is guided by the opened electric accessory 6500a2 and easily enters the specific winning opening 6500a, but is easier than the tip (upper end) of the electric accessory 6500a2. There is also a possibility that the ball may pass through the left side and flow down to a region below the game board 13 (a region where the first entrance 64 and the exit 66 are provided).

  As described above, in the second modified example of the seventh embodiment, when a game ball is fired toward the right second flow path, the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 6500a. When the game ball is continuously fired toward the right first channel during the jackpot, the period until the game ball reaches the variable prize device 6500 is long (the execution period of the jackpot game is long), Almost all game balls that have reached while the specific winning opening 6500a is open can be made to enter the specific winning opening 6500a. On the other hand, when the game ball is continuously fired and directed toward the right second channel during the jackpot, the period until the game ball reaches the variable winning device 6500 is short (the jackpot game can be completed in a short period of time). However, there is a risk that some (for example, one out of every ten balls) game balls will enter the out port 66 without entering the specific winning port 6500a. . Therefore, similarly to the above-described fifth embodiment, instead of prolonging the jackpot period, it is possible to reduce the useless balls (game balls that enter the out port 66 without entering the specific winning opening 6500a). It is possible to allow the player to select between the game characteristics that can be achieved and the game characteristics in which the number of useless balls is relatively increased while the big hit can be digested quickly.

<Third Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a third modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described seventh embodiment, the period of passing through the right first flow path is extended by the detouring object 700 provided in the right first flow path. Thus, when a game ball flows down the first right channel, the winning rate for the specific winning opening 65a is maximized, while the period until reaching the specific winning opening 65a is extended.

  On the other hand, in the third modified example, the bypass role 700 is deleted from the right first flow path, and the width of the flow path is less than two game balls (that is, the bypass role 700 is provided). So that the width of the flow path becomes narrower than in the case where the pressure is set. Then, as a configuration for extending the period during which the game ball flows down the right first flow path, a plurality of rotating bodies 861 to 863 are arranged in the right first flow path. By narrowing the width of the right first flow path, the ratio of the area of the right first flow path to the area of the game board 13 can be reduced. Can be increased.

  A game board 13 of a pachinko machine 10 according to a third modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 13 in the third modification. As shown in FIG. 98, in the game board 13 in the third modification, the bypass board 700 in the right first channel is different from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 90). The difference is that a plurality of rotating bodies 861 to 863 are provided instead, and that the width of the right first flow path is narrow and the width of the right second flow path is wide.

  The above-described rotating bodies 861 to 863 will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 98, three rotators 861 to 863 are provided in the first right channel. The operation of the three rotators 861 to 863 will be described using the rotator 861 as an example. As shown in FIG. 98, the rotating body 861 is formed in a substantially crescent shape in which a part of a circular shape is hollow, and can rotate counterclockwise in a front view with the rotating shaft 861b as the rotating shaft. It is configured to be possible. In addition, the rotating body 861 is provided with a ball stopper 861a that can receive only one flowing game ball. In a state where the ball stopper 861a faces the upstream direction of the right first channel, the game ball that has reached the rotating body 861 is received by the ball stopper 861a. Since the ball stopper 861a rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating body 861, the game ball received by the ball stopper 861a also rotates around the rotation shaft 861b. Then, when the ball stopper 861a faces the downstream side in the right first channel, the ball stopper 861a falls to the downstream side of the right first channel by gravity acting on the game ball.

  On the other hand, when the game ball reaches the rotating body 861 in a state where the ball stopper 861a does not face the upstream direction in the first right flow path, the ball contacts the upstream side of the outer peripheral portion of the rotating body 861. State. The state in which the game ball is in contact with the outer peripheral portion continues until the rotating body 861 rotates to bring the ball stopper 861a into an upstream direction of the right first channel. When the ball stopping portion 861a faces the upstream direction of the right first flow path, the game ball flows down to the ball stopping portion 861a, and thereafter, as described above, the rotating shaft rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating body 861. After performing a rotation operation with the rotation axis 861b as the rotation axis, it falls to the downstream side in the first right channel.

  As described above, by providing the rotating bodies 861 to 863 for the right first flow path, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball every time the rotating body reaches each rotating body. A plurality of game balls that temporarily stop the game ball that has reached each rotating body, cause the ball stopping portion to receive the game ball, and perform a rotating operation about the rotation axis in conjunction with the rotating operation of the rotating body. Can be performed. Therefore, as compared with the case where the rotating bodies 861 to 863 are provided, the period required for the game ball reaching the right first flow path to completely flow down the right first flow path can be lengthened. Therefore, compared with the game ball fired by the left hit, the period until the game ball fired toward the right first flow path reaches the lower area of the game board 13 can be lengthened.

  As described above, in the third modification of the seventh embodiment, instead of the detouring object 700, a plurality of rotating bodies 861 to 863 having a relatively small installation area are arranged in the right first flow path. I have. Then, by lowering the flow speed of the game ball by each of the rotating bodies 861 to 863 (to prevent the game ball from flowing down), the game ball fired toward the right first flow path reaches the lower area of the game board 13. Is configured to be longer than the period until the game ball fired by the left hit reaches the lower region. With these, the area occupied by the right first flow path can be reduced while realizing the same gaming properties as in the above-described seventh embodiment, so that the degree of freedom of the board surface configuration can be further improved.

  In the third modification of the seventh embodiment, three rotators are provided for the first right channel. However, the number and arrangement of the rotators are the same as those of the third modification. It is not limited and can be arbitrarily determined.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments at all, and it is easily inferred that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. You can do it.

  In the fifth to seventh embodiments and the modifications thereof, the flow path having the bypass role 700 is arranged on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, but the board surface configuration is arbitrarily changed. can do. For example, a configuration in which the bypass accessory 700 is arranged on the left side of the variable display device unit 890 may be adopted.

  In the fifth to seventh embodiments and the modifications thereof, the guide passages 740 to 790 of the bypass accessory 700 are configured to protrude forward from the base plate 60 of the game board 13. It is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the detouring object 700 is provided on the back side of the base plate 60. That is, the bypass role 700 is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, and the front side of the bypass role 700 in the base plate 60 is made of at least a transparent material, so that the flowing state of the game ball can be visually observed. I do. Then, of the base plate 60, the upstream side of the detouring object 700 (the position where the game ball that has progressed to the back side of the base plate 60 can flow into the opening 710) and the downstream side (flow out of the opening 720). A configuration in which an opening having a size that penetrates the base plate 60 and allows the game balls to pass through may be provided at a position where the game balls can flow out to the near side of the base plate 60). With such a configuration, a nail, a windmill, or the like can be arranged in the base plate 60 in front of the detouring object 700. That is, the board surface of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined based on the success / failure and the prefetch result (variation type) of the variation pattern is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the above, a configuration may be adopted in which the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect is performed based on the jackpot type. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot from the presence or absence of the execution of the continuous announcement effect and the effect type of the announcement effect, thereby improving the interest of the player in the continuous announcement effect. Can be.

  In each of the above embodiments, the continuous announcement effect is more likely to be executed as the lottery result with a higher degree of expectation is obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a continuous announcement effect is more likely to be executed as the lottery result with a lower degree of expectation. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played in the expectation that the continuous announcement effect will not be executed. Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the variable display with the announcement effect is continuously performed over the plurality of variable displays, but the plurality of continuous It is not necessary to execute a notice effect over the variable display. For example, at the start of each variable display in which the continuous announcement effect is set, it may be configured to randomly select whether to set the announcement effect. In this case, the lottery probability of setting the announcement effect in each variable display may be increased as the expectation degree of the winning information which triggered the setting of the continuous announcement effect is increased. By configuring in this way, the expectation for the jackpot can be increased as the notice effect continues, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the notice lottery prohibition state is released, one or a plurality of data stored in the prize information storage area 223a is not determined one by one, but the logical sum data (first execution) is determined. The execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined based on data indicating the content of the held lottery results, such as the form), points (second embodiment), the value of the high expectation degree type flag 223n (third embodiment), and the like. Although it was configured, it is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which one or a plurality of data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is determined one by one. In each of the above embodiments, only when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum data (first embodiment), points (second embodiment), and the value of the high expectation degree type flag 223n (third execution) Form), the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined based on the data indicating the content of the held lottery result, but the present invention is not limited to this. In some or all of the determinations as to whether or not the determination is possible, the determination may be made based on data indicating the contents of the held lottery results. Conversely, in a state other than the announcement lottery prohibition state (normal state), it is always determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on only the lottery result notified by the winning information command (random number range command). It may be.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the configuration is such that the advance announcement lottery prohibition state is set when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, but the setting timing of the advance announcement lottery prohibition state is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily set. May be determined. Specifically, for example, the announcement lottery prohibition state may be set only when the execution of the continuous announcement effect that eventually becomes a jackpot is determined. That is, the continuous announcement effect may be configured to be overwritable during execution of the continuous announcement effect that is out of order. With such a configuration, the frequency of execution of the continuous announcement effect can be increased, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Also, for example, the preliminary lottery prohibition state may be set based on the start of the jackpot, or the advance lottery prohibition state may be set based on the fact that the special symbol change state or the normal symbol time reduction state has started. Is also good. Further, for example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to set the advance notice lottery prohibition state by lottery every time the fluctuation start timing is reached, or, for example, to provide operating means operable by the player, The configuration may be such that the setting and cancellation of the notice lottery prohibition state are switched according to the operation content. Similarly, the timing at which the notice lottery prohibition state is released is not limited to the timing at which one normal fluctuation display ends after the continuous notice effect has ended, and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the configuration may be such that the preliminary lottery prohibition state is not released from the end of the continuous preview production until the end of the five variable displays, or, conversely, the preliminary lottery prohibition state is released at the end of the continuous preview production. May be. Alternatively, it may be canceled at a predetermined timing during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, or may be canceled regardless of the continuous announcement effect. For example, it may be configured to be released based on the end of a jackpot, a probable change state, a time reduction state, or the like.While the notice lottery prohibition state is set, each time the variable display is executed, whether to release by lottery is determined. May be determined. Moreover, you may comprise so that release is possible based on operation of a player. Further, the preliminary lottery prohibition state may not be provided.

  In the above embodiments, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the start winning command (random number range command) output from the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Not something. For example, the main control device 110 may determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, and notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the determination result. In this case, information indicating whether or not the continuous announcement effect is the set fluctuation pattern may be transmitted by being included in the fluctuation pattern command, or may be transmitted by another command. Further, the configuration may be such that only the determination that execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined is output to the sound lamp control device 113, and the period during which the continuous announcement effect is continued is grasped on the sound lamp control device 113 side. .

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the preview lottery prohibition state is configured to be set only after the execution of the continuous preview effect is determined and after the end of the continuous preview effect and until one variable display ends. , But is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a notice lottery prohibition state is set even when a big hit occurs. At the end of the jackpot, the notice lottery prohibition state is released, and data (logical sum data (first embodiment), points (second (Embodiment) or a configuration in which it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the value of the high expectation degree type flag 223n (the third embodiment). Here, during the jackpot, since the player fires a ball aiming at the specific winning opening 65a, the player also hits the first ball opening 64 (see FIG. 2) provided vertically above the specific winning opening 65a. There is a high possibility that more than one ball will enter. That is, there is a high possibility that a plurality of reserve balls increase from the start of the jackpot until the end. In this situation, if it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed each time the start winning prize for the first entrance 64 generated during the big hit is detected, the starting winning prize corresponding to the variation type having a low degree of expectation first is obtained. After the continuous announcement effect is determined on the basis of and the announcement lottery prohibition state is set, there is a possibility that a start winning prize corresponding to the fluctuation type having a high degree of expectation may occur. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation type having a high degree of expectation, even though the reserved ball corresponding to the fluctuation type having a high degree of expectation exists in the suspension. There is a risk of disappearing. On the other hand, during the jackpot, the announcement lottery prohibition state is set, and at the end of the jackpot, the announcement lottery prohibition state is released, and the continuous announcement production is performed based on the lottery result of each reserved ball held at that time. If it is configured to determine whether or not execution is possible, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the holding ball of the fluctuation type having the highest expectation among the holding balls held at the end of the jackpot. it can. Therefore, the continuous announcement effect can be set more suitably.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the preliminary lottery prohibition state is cancelled, the example in which the determination of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is performed according to the variation type of the plurality of holding balls has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this determination. For example, the technology of each of the above-described embodiments may be applied to a gaming machine (a so-called gaming machine equipped with a so-called reservation announcement effect) configured to be able to change a mode of a reserved symbol to a mode different from a normal mode. . In other words, the prohibited state in which the mode of the reserved symbol is prohibited is set based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, when the execution of the reserved announcement effect is determined or when the big hit is started), When the prohibition state is released, the variation type of the plurality of retained balls that are suspended at the time of the release is determined, and with the lottery probability according to the variation type having the highest expectation, whether or not to execute the suspension notice, and It is good also as a structure which determines the aspect of a hold | maintenance symbol at the time of performing a hold notice. Further, the technology of each of the above embodiments is not limited to the case where the fluctuation type of the reserved ball is determined in order to execute the continuous preliminary announcement effect, the preliminary preliminary announcement effect, and the like. When some kind of determination is performed on a plurality of reserved balls, the technology of each of the above embodiments can be applied.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the preliminary lottery prohibition state is released, the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous preliminary announcement effect is performed according to the variation type of the plurality of reserved balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, without setting the preliminary lottery prohibition state, each time a start winning is detected, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed (continuous announcement effect is being executed) according to the variation type of each of the held balls at that time. Then, the configuration may be such that the continuous announcement effect is determined to be extended or not). With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the control depending on whether or not the preliminary lottery is prohibited, so that the description content of the control program can be simplified. Therefore, the development load on the developer can be reduced.

  Each of the above embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof. More specifically, for example, the main control unit 110 notifies the audio lamp control unit 113 of a range of values to which various counter values (random number values) according to the second embodiment belong. A series of controls for performing a prefetch process based on a range of values to which various counter values (random number values) belong may be applied to the first embodiment and the third embodiment.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (When the read-ahead prohibition state is canceled, all the reservations are pre-read)
In a gaming machine having main control means for executing main control relating to a game and slave control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment, privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a first discrimination result by the discriminating means, and the discriminating means First output means for outputting a determination result signal indicating a determination result by the control means to the slave control means, and determination information obtaining means for obtaining determination information used for determination by the determination means based on satisfaction of a predetermined obtaining condition; A second output unit that can output a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit to the slave control unit before the determination condition is satisfied, A control unit configured to receive at least the determination result signal output by the first output unit and the determination information signal output by the second output unit; A first effect execution means for executing a first effect in accordance with the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal based on the reception of the discrimination result signal; Based on the reception, the information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal can be stored at least until the corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means, with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. An information storage unit that, when the specific condition is satisfied, performs a specific determination based on information corresponding to the plurality of determination information signals stored in the information storage unit; The specific determination means that can be executed and, based on the result of the second determination by the determination by the specific determination means, over one or a plurality of execution periods of the first effect performed after the determination. A gaming machine A1 comprising: a second effect executing means for executing a second effect.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and various types of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-133873). 2003-325886).

  Also, in such conventional gaming machines, by performing an effect of the same system (a so-called continuous notice effect is performed) over a plurality of variable display execution periods, a plurality of continuous There are some which can keep the player's expectation continuously over the displayed fluctuation display.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, during the execution of one continuous announcement effect, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined again, and the continuous announcement effect may be repeatedly executed. In this case, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand which of the variable displays in the continuous announcement effect should be expected.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, the main control means determines that the first determination result is obtained by the determination means executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A determination result signal indicating the determination result by the determination means is output to the slave control means by the first output means. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information signal based on the acquired discrimination information is output before the discrimination condition is satisfied. It is output to the slave control means by the two output means. In the slave control means, the determination result signal output by the first output means and the determination information signal output by the second output means are received by the signal receiving means. Based on the determination result signal being received by the signal receiving means, a first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal is executed by the first effect execution means. Based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, the information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means at least corresponding to a predetermined number of information, at least up to a predetermined number of information. Until it is stored by the information storage means. When the specific condition is satisfied, a specific determination is performed by the specific determination unit based on information corresponding to the plurality of determination information signals stored in the information storage unit, and a second determination result is obtained by the determination by the specific determination unit. , The second effect is executed by the second effect executing means over the execution period of one or more first effects executed after the determination.

  Thus, the second effect can be executed over one or more execution periods of the first effect, so that the effects can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, upon reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, at the time of reception for discriminating whether to execute the second effect based on information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal. A gaming machine A2 comprising a determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the second effect is produced based on the information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal when the discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means. Since it is determined by the reception-time determining means whether to execute the second effect, the chance of executing the second effect can be increased, and the effect can be further diversified.

  In the gaming machine A2, when it is determined by the reception-time determination means that the second performance is to be performed, the second performance execution means is configured to execute the first performance corresponding to the determination information signal that triggered the determination. A gaming machine A3 that executes the second effect over a plurality of execution periods of the first effect including at least the following.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, when it is determined that the second effect is to be executed by the receiving time determination means, the first effect corresponding to the determination information signal that triggered the determination is performed. Since the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means over at least a plurality of execution periods of the first effect, the effect can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, a limitation state setting means for setting a limitation state in which the determination by the reception time determination means is limited based on satisfaction of a predetermined setting condition, and the limitation state setting means sets the limitation state. Is set, the release means is configured to release the determination restriction state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined release condition, and the specific condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the predetermined release condition. A gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A2 or A3. That is, the discrimination restriction state in which the discrimination by the reception time discrimination means is restricted is set by the restriction state setting means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined setting condition. When the determination restriction state is set by the restriction state setting means, the determination restriction state is released by the release means based on satisfaction of a predetermined release condition. The specific condition is satisfied when the predetermined release condition is satisfied.

  With this, when the determination restriction state is released, the determination by the specific determination unit can be performed based on the information corresponding to the plurality of determination result signals already stored in the information storage unit, so that the second effect Is determined based on information corresponding to a larger number of determination result signals.

  In the gaming machine A4, the limitation state setting means sets the determination limitation state based on the reception time determination means determining that the second effect is to be executed. .

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A4, the determination restriction state is set by the restriction state setting means based on the reception time determination means determining that the second effect is to be executed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of the second effect from being redundantly determined by the reception determination unit during the execution of the second effect.

  The gaming machine A6, wherein in the gaming machine A5, the predetermined release condition is established based on execution of at least one of the first effects after the second effect is finished.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, after the second effect is completed, the predetermined release condition is satisfied based on execution of at least one first effect. If at least one first effect is being executed during the execution of the second effect and after the second effect is finished, it is possible to limit the determination whether to execute the second effect. Therefore, the first effect without the second effect can be executed at least once from the end of the second effect to the start of the second effect next time. It is possible for the player to easily understand whether the game has been continued up to the first effect. Therefore, there is an effect that a more easily understandable effect can be realized.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the specific determination unit includes information corresponding to the first determination result in information corresponding to the determination information signal stored in the information storage unit. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the ratio of the second discrimination result is higher in the case where the second discrimination result is included than in the case where the information corresponding to the first discrimination result is not included.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the information corresponding to the first determination result is included in the information corresponding to the determination information signal stored in the information storage unit. The discrimination by the specific discrimination means is performed such that the ratio of the second discrimination result is higher when the information is included than when the information corresponding to the first discrimination result is not included. When the second effect is executed, there is an effect that the player can be caused to perform the game in expectation of the execution of the bonus game.

<Characteristic B group> (determination of the variation type suspended from the logical sum data of each suspension area)
In a gaming machine having main control means for executing main control relating to a game and slave control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment, privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a first discrimination result by the discriminating means, and the discriminating means First output means for outputting a determination result signal indicating a determination result by the control means to the slave control means, and determination information obtaining means for obtaining determination information used for determination by the determination means based on satisfaction of a predetermined obtaining condition; A second output unit that can output a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit to the slave control unit before the determination condition is satisfied, A control unit configured to receive at least the determination result signal output by the first output unit and the determination information signal output by the second output unit; A first effect execution means for executing a first effect in accordance with the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal based on the reception of the discrimination result signal; Based on the reception, the information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal can be stored at least until the corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means, with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. The information storage means performs a predetermined operation on information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means when the specific condition is satisfied. Calculation data calculation means for calculating predetermined calculation data, and second performance execution determination means for determining whether to execute a second performance based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, Based on the determination by the second effect execution determining means that the second effect is to be executed, the second effect is executed over one or a plurality of execution periods of the first effect executed after the determination. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a second effect executing means for executing an effect.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and various types of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-133873). 2003-325886).

  Also, in such conventional gaming machines, by performing an effect of the same system (a so-called continuous notice effect is performed) over a plurality of variable display execution periods, a plurality of continuous There are some which can keep the player's expectation continuously over the displayed fluctuation display.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, during the execution of one continuous announcement effect, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined again, and the continuous announcement effect may be repeatedly executed. In this case, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand which of the variable displays in the continuous announcement effect should be expected. In order to solve this, when one continuous announcement effect is determined, there is a method of restricting the determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect until the continuous announcement effect ends. In this case, since the continuous announcement effect cannot be executed for the holding ball based on the winning start detected during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the next continuous announcement effect is executed after one continuous announcement effect is completed. There was a case where a relatively long period was left before the operation was completed. Further, based on the lottery results of all the reserved balls held during the continuous announcement effect, a method of determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect after the end of the continuous announcement effect is also conceivable. Since it is necessary to determine the lottery result of the reserved ball, there is a problem that the processing load increases as compared with the determination of whether or not the normal continuous announcement effect can be executed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, in the main control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the result of the first judgment by the judgment means. . A determination result signal indicating the determination result by the determination means is output to the slave control means by the first output means. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information signal based on the acquired discrimination information is satisfied by the second output means. Prior to this, it is output to the slave control means. In the slave control means, the determination result signal output from the first output means and the determination information signal output from the second output means are received by the signal receiving means. Based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means, a first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal is executed by the first effect execution means. Based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, the information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means at least corresponding to a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. Until it is stored by the information storage means. When the specific condition is satisfied, a predetermined calculation is performed by the calculation data calculation means on the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means to calculate predetermined calculation data. Based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, it is determined by the second performance execution determination means whether to execute the second performance. Based on the determination that the second effect is to be executed by the determination by the second effect execution determining means, the second effect executing means performs one or a plurality of first effect execution periods that are executed after the determination. A second effect is performed.

  With this, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the second effect based on predetermined calculation data obtained as a result of performing a predetermined calculation on information corresponding to the plurality of determination information signals. The processing load on the slave control means is reduced as compared with the case where all the information stored in the sub-control unit is determined one by one and the determination as to whether to execute the second effect is performed based on each determination result. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine B1, based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, a predetermined identification is performed in information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals targeted for the predetermined calculation. Information determination means for determining whether information corresponding to the determination information is included, and the second effect execution determination means determines that the information corresponding to the specific determination information is included by the information determination means. A gaming machine B2 for determining whether to execute the second effect based on the predetermined calculation data when determined.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, information corresponding to a predetermined specific determination information among information corresponding to a plurality of determination information signals subjected to the predetermined calculation. Is determined by the information determining means. When the information discriminating means determines that the information corresponding to the specific discriminating information is included, the second effect execution discriminating means determines whether to execute the second effect based on predetermined calculation data.

  Thus, the opportunity for performing the determination by the second effect execution determination unit can be limited to a case where the information corresponding to the specific determination information is included, so that the frequency of the determination process can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load on the slave control means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B2, the type of the predetermined specific discrimination information includes first discrimination information corresponding to the first discrimination result and second discrimination corresponding to a discrimination result different from the first discrimination result. Discrimination information is provided at least, and the second effect execution discrimination means uses the first discrimination information more than the discrimination that the information discrimination means includes the second discrimination information. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that it is determined that the second effect is executed at a higher rate when it is determined that the second effect is included.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2. That is, at least, as the type of predetermined specific determination information, at least first determination information corresponding to the first determination result and second determination information corresponding to a determination result different from the first determination result are provided. ing. The second effect execution determination unit determines that the second effect execution determination unit has a higher ratio when it is determined that the first determination information is included than when the second determination information is included by the information determination unit. It is determined that an effect is performed.

  Accordingly, when the second effect is executed, there is an effect that the player can expect that the bonus game is executed as the first determination result.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the main control unit specifies a determination result by the determination unit before the determination condition is satisfied, based on the determination information being obtained by the determination information obtaining unit. A priori identification unit; and a discrimination information signal generation unit configured to generate the discrimination information signal by including at least information corresponding to the determination result specified by the preliminary identification unit. A storage area composed of a plurality of bits corresponding to each of the plurality of determination results that can be specified by the specifying means is configured to have at least the predetermined number of pieces of information. Based on the reception of the discrimination information signal, one of the storage areas provided in the information storage means corresponds to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal. Bit setting means for setting a bit to a specific state, wherein the calculation data calculation means calculates, as the predetermined calculation, a logical sum of information according to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means. The information is calculated as the predetermined operation data, and the information determining unit includes information corresponding to specific determination information when a specific bit of the logical sum is in the specific state. Gaming machine B4, characterized in that it is determined that

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B2 or B3. That is, in the main control means, based on the acquisition of the discrimination information by the discrimination information acquisition means, the discrimination result by the discrimination means is specified by the prior specification means before the discrimination condition is satisfied. A discrimination information signal including at least information corresponding to the discrimination result specified by the pre-specifying means is generated by the discrimination information signal generating means. A storage area composed of a plurality of bits corresponding to each of a plurality of determination results that can be specified by the advance specifying unit is provided in the information storage unit by at least a predetermined number of information. In the slave control means, based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, a bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal is set in one of the storage areas provided in the information storage means. It is set to a specific state by means. As a predetermined operation, a logical sum of information according to a plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage unit is calculated as predetermined operation data by the operation data calculation unit. When the specific bit of the logical sum is in a specific state, the information determining unit determines that the information corresponding to the specific determination information is included.

  This makes it possible to obtain a result equivalent to that of determining all the information used for the logical sum by merely determining the state of the specific bit of the logical sum. There is an effect that it can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B4, the bit setting means sets a bit corresponding to the determination result indicated by the determination information signal to an on state, and sets other bits to an off state. .

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the bit corresponding to the determination result indicated by the determination information signal is set to the on state by the bit setting means, and the other bits are set to the off state. Therefore, there is an effect that the determination by the second effect execution determination unit can be accurately performed.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, as the type of the specific determination information, a plurality of types having different priorities to be determined by the second effect execution determination unit are set. Is for determining a bit corresponding to the determination result with the highest priority among the bits in the specific state, and the second effect execution determination unit is configured to determine the bit determined by the determination unit. A game machine B6 for determining whether to execute the second effect at a determination ratio corresponding to the above.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B4 or B5. That is, a plurality of types having different priorities to be determined by the second effect execution determination means are set as types of the specific determination result. Among the bits in the specific state, the bit corresponding to the determination result with the highest priority is determined by the information determination unit. Whether the second effect is to be executed is determined by the second effect execution determining unit based on the determination ratio corresponding to the bit determined by the determining unit.

  This makes it possible to vary the rate at which the second effect is determined to be executed in accordance with the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means specified by the prior specifying means. There is an effect that the player can be inferred from the presence or absence.

  In the gaming machine B6, when determining the specific bit, the information determination unit determines whether the specific state is in the specific state in descending order of the priority from the bit corresponding to the determination result with the highest priority. Wherein the slave control means includes a discrimination discontinuation means for discontinuing the discrimination by the information discrimination means based on the discrimination that the information discrimination means is in the specific state. Gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B6. That is, when a specific bit is determined by the information determination unit, it is determined whether the specific state is a specific state from the bit corresponding to the determination result with the highest priority to the highest priority. In the slave control means, the discrimination by the information discrimination means is terminated by the discrimination discontinuation means based on the discrimination that the information discrimination means has entered the specific state.

  Accordingly, the determination processing can be terminated without determining all bits constituting a specific bit, and thus there is an effect that the processing load on the slave control means can be reduced.

<Feature C group> (Specific information indicating the content of the suspension is updated as a sub, and it is determined based on the specific information whether continuous notice can be executed)
In a gaming machine having main control means for executing main control relating to a game and slave control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment, privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a first discrimination result by the discriminating means, and the discriminating means First output means for outputting a determination result signal indicating a determination result by the control means to the slave control means, and determination information obtaining means for obtaining determination information used for determination by the determination means based on satisfaction of a predetermined obtaining condition; A second output unit that can output a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit to the slave control unit before the determination condition is satisfied, A control unit configured to receive at least the determination result signal output by the first output unit and the determination information signal output by the second output unit; A first effect execution means for executing a first effect in accordance with the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination result signal based on the reception of the discrimination result signal; a specific information storage means storing specific information; Means for determining a determination result by the determination means corresponding to the received determination information signal based on the reception of the determination information signal by the means; and the determination result specified by the determination result identification means. A second effect based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means; A second effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to perform, and one or a plurality of instructions to be executed after the determination based on the determination by the second effect execution determining means to execute the second effect. A gaming machine C1 comprising: a second effect execution unit that executes the second effect over an execution period of the first effect.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and various types of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-133873). 2003-325886).

  Also, in such conventional gaming machines, by performing an effect of the same system (a so-called continuous notice effect is performed) over a plurality of variable display execution periods, a plurality of continuous There are some which can keep the player's expectation continuously over the displayed fluctuation display.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, during the execution of one continuous announcement effect, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined again, and the continuous announcement effect may be repeatedly executed. In this case, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand which of the variable displays in the continuous announcement effect should be expected.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, in the main control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the result of the first judgment by the judgment means. . A determination result signal indicating the determination result by the determination means is output to the slave control means by the first output means. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information signal based on the acquired discrimination information is satisfied by the second output means. Prior to this, it is output to the slave control means. In the slave control means, the determination result signal output by the first output means and the determination information signal output by the second output means are received by the signal receiving means. Based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means, a first effect according to the determination result indicated by the determination result signal is executed by the first effect execution means. Based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, the discrimination result by the discrimination means corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is specified by the discrimination result specifying means, and the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means is provided. , The specific information stored in the specific information storage means is updated by the information update means. Based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, whether or not to execute the second effect is determined by the second effect execution determination means, and the second effect execution determination means determines that the second effect is to be executed. , The second effect is executed by the second effect executing means over an execution period of one or more first effects executed after the determination.

  Thus, the second effect can be executed over one or more execution periods of the first effect, so that the effects can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, when the determination result is specified by the determination result specifying means, the reception determining means for determining whether to execute the second effect based on the specified determination result, 2. A gaming machine C2 comprising: switching means for determining whether the second effect is to be performed by the second effect execution determining means or by the reception determining means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, when the discrimination result is specified by the discrimination result specifying means, the reception discriminating means determines whether to perform two effects based on the specified discrimination result. Whether the second effect is to be performed by the second effect executing means or the reception determining means is determined by the switching means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in determining whether to execute the second effect can be increased.

  In the gaming machine C2, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, a restriction state setting unit that sets a determination restriction state in which the determination by the reception determination unit is restricted, and the determination restriction state is set by the restriction state setting unit. And a release unit that releases the determination restriction state based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition, wherein the switching unit performs the second effect based on the establishment of the predetermined release condition. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the determination as to whether or not to execute is switched so as to be performed by the second effect execution determination means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2. That is, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined setting condition, when a determination restriction state in which determination by the reception determination means is restricted is set by the restriction state setting means, and the determination restriction state is set by the restriction state setting means, The determination restriction state is released by the release means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined release condition. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined release condition, the switching unit switches so as to determine whether to execute the second effect by the second effect execution determining unit.

  Thereby, when the determination restriction state is released, it is possible to determine whether to execute the second effect by the second effect execution determination unit based on the specific information updated during the determination restriction state. There is an effect that the determination by the second effect execution determination unit can be performed in consideration of the determination result corresponding to the determination information signal received during the determination limited state.

  In the gaming machine C3, the switching means determines whether or not to execute the second effect based on the determination as to whether to execute the second effect by the second effect execution determining means. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that the switching is performed by a determining means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3, whether the second effect is to be executed is determined based on whether the second effect is determined to be executed by the second effect execution determining means. Is switched by the switching means so as to be performed by the reception determining means, so that it is possible to suitably determine whether to execute the second effect.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the specific information is updated by the information updating means from when the determination restriction state is released by the release means to when the determination restriction state is next set by the restriction state setting means. A gaming machine C5 comprising update avoidance means for avoiding being performed.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3 or C4, the information is updated during the period from when the determination restriction state is released by the release means to when the determination restriction state is next set by the restriction state setting means. Since the update of the specific information by the means is avoided by the update avoiding means, it is possible to suppress the unnecessary updating of the specific information during the period in which the determination using the specific information by the second effect executing means is difficult to execute. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load on the slave control means can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the slave control unit stores, for each of the determination results that can be specified by the determination result specifying unit, specification information in which numerical data is defined in association with each other. The information updating means performs a predetermined operation using the numerical data specified in the specification information in association with the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means, thereby obtaining the identification information. Gaming machine C6, characterized in that the game machine C6 is updated.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5. That is, in the slave control means, for each determination result that can be specified by the determination result specifying means, the specified information in which the numerical data is associated and specified is stored in the specified information storage means. Using the numerical data specified in association with the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means, a predetermined calculation is performed by the information updating means to update the specific information.

  Thus, the specific information can be updated by a simple process of reading out the numerical data specified for each determination result and performing a predetermined operation, so that the processing load when updating the specific information can be reduced. There is.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the specific information storage means stores, as the specific information, information indicating one determination result specified by the determination result specifying means, and the slave control means The priority corresponding to the determination result newly specified by the determination result specifying means is determined based on the priority determined in advance for each of the determination results that can be specified by the determination result specifying means. Priority determining means for determining whether the priority is higher than the priority corresponding to the determination result indicated by the specific information already stored in the information storage means; If it is determined that the priority corresponding to the identified result is higher, the identification information is updated to information indicating the newly identified determination result. Gaming machine C7, characterized in that it is intended to.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5. That is, information indicating one determination result specified by the determination result specifying means is stored in the specific information storage means as the specific information. In the slave control means, based on the priority determined in advance for each determination result that can be specified by the determination result specifying means, the priority corresponding to the determination result newly specified by the determination result specifying means is stored in the specific information storage. The priority determining means determines whether the priority is higher than the priority corresponding to the determination result indicated by the specific information already stored in the means. When it is determined that the priority corresponding to the newly specified determination result by the priority determination means is higher, the specific information is updated by the information updating means to information indicating the newly specified determination result. You.

  Thus, even if the discrimination information signal is output a plurality of times, the specific information storage means stores the discrimination result of the highest priority among the plurality of discrimination results notified by the discrimination information signal a plurality of times. Since only the information indicating the result can be stored, it is possible to determine whether to execute the second effect based on the determination information having the highest priority.

  In the gaming machine C7, the slave control unit determines whether or not the determination by the determination unit that is the newly determined determination result based on the update of the specific information by the information update unit is performed. A number-of-times specifying means for specifying the number of times of the first effect executed during, and a number-of-times information storage means for storing number-of-effects information corresponding to the number of times of the first effect specified by the number-of-times specifying means. Wherein the second effect execution means executes the second effect over the execution period of the first effect the number of times indicated by the effect number information stored in the effect number information storage means. A gaming machine C8 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C7. That is, based on the fact that the specific information has been updated by the information updating means, the sub-control means performs the first effect of the first effect that is performed until the determination is performed by the determining means that is the newly specified determination result. The number of times is specified by the number specifying means. Effect number information corresponding to the number of first effects specified by the number specifying means is stored by the effect number information storage means. The second effect is executed by the second effect executing means over the execution period of the first effect of the number of times indicated by the effect number information stored in the effect number information storage means.

  Accordingly, when the second effect is determined by the second effect execution determining unit, the execution period of the first effect of the number of times indicated by the effect number information stored in the effect number information storage unit is changed to the second effect. Since the second effect can be executed by a simple control of setting as the execution period, there is an effect that the processing load in executing the second effect can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C8, the slave control means reduces the effect number information stored in the effect number information storage means to one less number based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means. A gaming machine C9 comprising: effect number information updating means for updating to the corresponding effect number information.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C8, the effect number information stored in the effect number information storage means is determined by the slave control means based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means. Since the effect number information updating means updates the effect number information corresponding to one less number of times, the second effect is more reliably continued until the execution period of the first effect corresponding to the determination information having the highest priority. There is an effect that can be.

<Feature D group> (Range value range acquired at the time of starting winning is transmitted to sub as winning information)
In a gaming machine having main control means for executing main control relating to a game, and slave control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means is provided within a predetermined range. A determination value generation means capable of updating and generating a determination value, and a determination value obtaining means for obtaining the determination value generated by the determination value generation means based on satisfaction of a predetermined obtaining condition; Determining means for determining whether the determination value obtained by the determination value obtaining means matches a predetermined specific value; and, when determining that the determination value matches the specific value, corresponding to the specific value. Control processing executing means for executing the set processing, and based on that the determination value is obtained by the determination value obtaining means, among the plurality of small ranges obtained by dividing the predetermined range into a plurality, I A small range specifying means for specifying which of the small ranges the value belongs to, and a signal for outputting a small range signal indicating the small range specified by the small range specifying means to the slave control means. Output means, and the slave control means, the signal receiving means for receiving the small range signal output by the signal output means, and at the opportunity of receiving the small range signal by the signal receiving means, A gaming machine D1 comprising: a determination result specifying unit that specifies a determination result by the determination unit based on the small range indicated by the small range signal.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in the main control means, the determination value generated within the predetermined range by the determination value generation means is obtained by the determination value obtaining means based on satisfaction of a predetermined obtaining condition. The determination value obtained by the determination value obtaining means determines whether or not the determination value matches a predetermined specific value. When it is determined by the determining means that the value matches the specific value, the processing set in accordance with the specific value is executed by the control processing executing means. Based on the determination value being obtained by the determination value obtaining means, among a plurality of small ranges obtained by dividing the predetermined range into a plurality of ranges, it is specified which of the small ranges the determination value acquired this time belongs to. Specified by means. A small range signal indicating the small range specified by the small range specifying means is output to the slave control means by the signal output means. Further, in the slave control means, the small range signal output by the signal output means is received by the signal receiving means, and the small range signal indicated by the small range signal is triggered by the reception of the small range signal by the signal receiving means. The determination result by the determination means is specified by the determination result specifying means based on the determination result.

  This has the effect that the secondary control means can suitably determine the result of the determination by the determination means.

  In the gaming machine D1, the slave control unit includes a regulation information storage unit that stores regulation information that defines a correspondence relationship between a type of the small range that can be notified by the small range signal and a determination result by the determination unit. The determination result specifying means is for specifying a determination result by the determination means based on a type of the small range indicated by the small range signal and the regulation information stored in the regulation information storage means. A gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, the specified information defining the correspondence between the type of the small range that can be notified by the small range signal and the result of the determination by the determining means is stored in the defined information storage means. Based on the type of the small range indicated by the small range signal and the specification information stored in the specification information storage means, a determination result by the determination means is specified by the determination result specifying means.

  Thus, there is an effect that the determination result can be easily specified based on the correspondence defined in the definition information.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the specific value includes a plurality of types including at least one or more values set as a first specific value and one or more values set as a second specific value. Wherein the control processing execution means executes the first processing when the determination value matches the first specific value, and the control value execution means matches the second specific value. A gaming machine D3 that executes a second process different from the first process when the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific value is provided with a plurality of types including at least one or a plurality of values set as the first specific value and one or a plurality of values set as the second specific value. When the judgment value matches the first specific value, the control processing execution means executes the first processing, while when the judgment value matches the second specific value, the control processing execution means Executes a second process different from the first process.

  Thereby, there is an effect that various processes can be executed in accordance with the type of the specific value whose determination value matches.

  In the gaming machine D3, the small range including the specific value among the small ranges is configured by only the specific type of specific value.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, the small range including the specific value is constituted only by the specific value of the same type. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a range or a small range in which a specific value and a value different from the specific value are mixed. Therefore, since the small range and the determination result by the determination unit can be made to correspond one-to-one, there is an effect that the determination by the determination result identification unit can be executed under conditions closer to the determination by the determination unit.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the main control unit stores the determination value obtained by the determination value obtaining unit at least until a determination condition for performing the determination by the determination unit is satisfied. A gaming machine D5 comprising storage means, wherein said signal output means is capable of outputting said small range signal to said slave control means before said determination condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, the judgment value obtained by the judgment value obtaining means is stored at least by the judgment value storage means until a judgment condition for executing the judgment by the judgment means is satisfied. Before the determination condition is satisfied, the small range signal is output to the slave control means by the signal output means.

  Thus, there is an effect that the result of determination by the determining means can be specified before the determination condition is satisfied in the slave control means.

  In the gaming machine D5, the main control unit includes a determination result signal output unit that outputs a determination result signal indicating a determination result by the determination unit, and the slave control unit receives the determination result signal by the signal receiving unit. The first effect execution means for executing the first effect indicating the discrimination result notified by the received discrimination result signal based on the judgment result, and the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means. A second effect execution determining means for determining whether to execute the second effect, and a determination result of the determination based on that the second effect is determined to be executed by the second effect execution determining means. A second production execution means for executing the second production over a plurality of execution periods of the first production including at least a first production showing: .

  According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D5. That is, in the main control unit, a determination result signal indicating the determination result by the determination unit is output by the determination result signal output unit. In the slave control means, based on the fact that the determination result signal has been received by the signal receiving means, the first performance showing the determination result notified by the received determination result signal is executed by the first performance execution means. Is done. Based on the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means, whether to execute the second effect is determined by the second effect execution determining means. Based on the determination that the second effect is to be executed by the second effect execution determining means, the second effect is determined over the execution period of the plurality of first effects including at least the first effect indicating the determination result of the determination. The second effect is executed by the second effect executing means.

  As a result, there is an effect that the effect form can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine D6, the secondary control means determines that the second effect is to be executed by the second effect execution determining means, and determines that the second effect is to be executed by the second effect execution determining means. And a release means for releasing the determination restriction state based on the execution of at least one first effect after the execution of the second effect is completed. A gaming machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D6. That is, in the slave control means, based on the determination that the second effect is to be executed by the second effect execution determining means, the determination limited state in which the determination by the second effect execution determining means is limited is determined by the determination limited state setting means. Is set. After the execution of the second effect is completed, the determination restriction state is released by the release means based on the execution of at least one first effect.

  Thus, during the execution of the second effect and after the end of the second effect, when at least one first effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent the second effect from being newly executed. Therefore, at least one first effect without the second effect can be executed from the end of the second effect to the start of the next second effect. Therefore, the timing at which the second effect is completed can be easily understood by the player, and an effect that can be more easily understood can be realized.

  In the gaming machine D7, the slave control means includes: a determination result information storage means capable of storing determination result information indicating the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit; When the determination restriction state is released by, based on the plurality of determination result information stored in the determination result information storage means, a release time determination means for determining whether to execute the second effect, Canceling the execution of the second effect over one or more execution periods of the first effect performed after the determination based on the determination made by the cancellation time determination means to execute the second effect. A game machine D8 comprising: a time execution unit.

  According to the gaming machine D8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D7. That is, in the slave control means, the determination result information indicating the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means is stored by the determination result information storage means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. When the determination restriction state is released by the release means, the release time determination means determines whether to execute the second effect based on the plurality of pieces of determination result information stored in the determination result information storage means. Based on the determination that the second effect is to be executed by the release-time determining means, the second effect is released by the release-time executing means over an execution period of one or more first effects executed after the determination. Be executed.

  Thus, when the determination restriction state is released, execution of the second effect can be set without waiting for a new small range signal to be output from the main control unit. In addition, it is possible to determine whether to execute the second effect in consideration of the determination result specified by the determination result specifying unit based on the small range signal output during the determination limited state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more appropriately determine whether to execute the second effect.

<Characteristic E group> (The period until the right-hit ball reaches the attacker is made longer than when the left-hit ball is hit)
A first flow path through which a game ball fired in a first direction can flow, a second flow path through which a game ball fired in a second direction different from the first direction can flow, and the first flow path The game ball that has flowed down, the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path has at least a ball entry means provided at a position where the ball can enter, and a predetermined value is determined based on the game ball having entered the ball entry means. Wherein the second flow path fires in the second direction more than a period until the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that a period until a given game ball reaches the ball entry means is longer.

  Here, in the case of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port is a prize, the state shifts to a winning state in which a large winning port is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. There is something. In such a conventional gaming machine, a predetermined number of prize balls are given each time a game ball is won to the special winning opening during the winning state, so that the player performs the game with the winning state as one enjoyment. Can be made.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to fire the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine in order to win the gaming ball to the special winning opening, so that the game in the hit state is monotonous. There was a problem that would be.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, game balls fired in the first direction flow down the first flow path, and game balls fired in the second direction different from the first direction flow through the second flow path. Flow down. Ball entry means is provided at a position where at least game balls flowing down the first flow path and game balls flowing down the second flow path can enter. A predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means based on the game ball having entered the ball-receiving means. The second period is set such that the period until the game ball fired in the second direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the period until the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means. A flow path is configured.

  This allows the player who wants to reach the ball entry means as soon as possible to fire the game ball aiming at the first flow path, while taking a relatively long time to play the game ball. Can be fired at the second flow path for a player who wants to reach the ball entry means. Therefore, since a game can be performed by selecting a preferred firing direction for each player, there is an effect that a monotonous game can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E1, the ball-in means is such that the rate at which game balls flowing down the second flow path enter is higher than the rate at which game balls flowing down the first flow path enters. A gaming machine E2, wherein the gaming machine E2 is disposed in the game machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, the rate at which game balls flowing down the second flow path enter is higher than the rate at which game balls flowing down the first flow path enter. Since the ball entry means is arranged at a higher position, when flowing down the first flow path, the period until reaching the ball entry means is shortened, but it is difficult to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, if the ball flows down the second flow path, the ball easily enters the ball entry means, but the time required to reach the ball entry means becomes longer. Therefore, there is an effect that the player himself / herself can select a firing direction that matches the taste of each player.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a gaming machine E3 comprising a speed-reducing means for reducing a flowing speed of a gaming ball flowing down the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the falling velocity of the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path is reduced by the speed reduction means, so that the gaming ball fired in the second direction enters. There is an effect that the period until the ball reaches the ball means can be made longer than the period until the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, it is possible to change between a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means, a determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, and a variable number of times the variable means performs the predetermined number of times from the second position based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. A gaming machine E4, comprising: a variable game execution unit that executes a variable game that changes to a first position.

  According to the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3. That is, the variable means is changed to a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position. The determination is performed by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. A variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the variable means a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means based on a specific result of the determination by the determination means.

  Thus, there is an effect that a game can be played in expectation of a specific determination result by the determination means.

  In the gaming machine E4, a launching means capable of launching a game ball in the first direction and the second direction at a firing interval equal to or longer than a specific firing interval; and during execution of the variable game, the variable means A first variable for changing the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined number or more of game balls entering the ball entry means after being changed from the position to the first position; Control means, and during execution of the variable game, changing the variable means to the first based on a lapse of a predetermined period of time after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. And second variable control means for changing the position to two positions. In the specific period, after the game ball is started to be fired in the second direction, the game ball is fired in the second direction at the certain fire interval. Said specific number of game balls Gaming machine E5, wherein at least longer than the period until after flowing down the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E4. That is, the firing means is configured to be able to fire the game ball in the first direction and the second direction at a firing interval equal to or longer than a specific firing interval. During execution of the variable game, based on the fact that a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered the ball entry means since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position, the variable means The first position is changed to the second position by the variable control means. During the execution of the variable game, the variable means is changed to the second position by the second variable control means based on the lapse of a predetermined time period from the change of the variable means to the first position from the second position. Is done. At least a specific period from the start of the game ball launch in the second direction to the specific number of game balls fired in the second direction at a specific launch interval until the flow ends in the second flow path Is configured to be longer.

  Thereby, when a game ball is fired in the second direction during execution of the variable game, a specific number of game balls can be made to enter the ball entry means before the specific period elapses. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress that a person loses.

  In the gaming machine E4, the variable game execution means sets a predetermined first period after the variable means is changed to the first position, triggered by the fact that a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the variable game. The variable means controls the variable means to be variable in a specific variable pattern including the predetermined number of times of the first variable operation to be changed to the second position after the lapse of one or more. During the execution period of the first variable operation, the game ball fired in the first direction can reach after the specific variable pattern is started, and the second variable operation is started after the specific variable pattern is started. A gaming machine E6 characterized in that gaming balls fired in two directions are difficult to reach.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E4. That is, when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the variable game, the first means is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period elapses after the changing means is changed to the first position. The variable game execution means is controlled so that the variable means is changed in a specific variable pattern including the variable operation a predetermined number of times. The execution period of one or a plurality of first variable operations in the specific variable pattern is such that game balls fired in the first direction after the specific variable pattern is started are reachable, and the specific variable pattern is started. After that, the game ball fired in the second direction becomes difficult to reach.

  Thus, when the game ball is fired in the second direction, the opportunity for the game ball to enter the ball entry means becomes smaller than when the game ball is fired in the first direction. It has the effect of making you think.

  In the gaming machine E6, a first gaming state is set as a gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed, when a gaming ball has not entered the ball entry means in one of the variable games. A game state setting means for setting a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entry means in the variable game. Machine E7.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E6, the game state after the execution of the variable game is over, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means in one variable game, While the first game state is set by the state setting means, the second state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, by the game state setting means when the game ball enters the ball-in means in one variable game. Since the game state is set, there is an effect that the player can play the game during execution of the variable game by paying more attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine E6 or E7, the first flow path allows the dropped game ball to reach the ball entry means from a third direction, and the second flow path causes the dropped game ball to flow in the third direction. The variable means is configured to allow a game ball to flow down the upper surface thereof while being changed to the second position, and The fourth direction side is inclined and disposed so as to be higher than the third direction side, and the ball entry means is in a state where the variable means is changed to the first position. In a state in which the game ball can enter from above and the variable means is changed to the second position, the upper part is closed by the variable means, and the variable means is From the fourth direction side to the third direction side Gaming machine E8, wherein from said second position by sliding in the direction in which varying the first position.

  According to the gaming machine E8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines E6 or E7. That is, while the game balls flowing down the first flow path reach the ball entry means from the third direction, the game balls flowing down the second flow path enter the ball entry means from the fourth direction different from the third direction. And reach. While the variable means is being changed to the second position, the game ball is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface thereof, and the variable means is inclined so that the fourth direction side is higher than the third direction side. Is arranged. In a state where the variable means is changed to the first position, the ball entry means is configured so that the game ball can enter from above. Further, in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position, a state in which the upper part of the ball entry means is closed by the variable means. By sliding in the direction from the fourth direction to the third direction, the variable means changes from the second position to the first position.

  Thereby, while the variable means is changing to the first position, it is difficult for the game ball reached from the third direction to enter the ball entry means, while the game ball reached from the fourth direction enters the ball. Easier to do. Therefore, during the execution of the variable game, it is more likely that the game ball that has reached the ball entry means will enter the ball entry means when it is fired in the second direction than when it is fired in the first direction. There is an effect that it can be increased.

<Feature F group> (Right-handing during a jackpot is more advantageous than left-handing in some aspects, but less advantageous than left-handing in another aspect)
A launching means capable of launching at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction; a determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determining condition; and a determination by the determining means. The bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the result of the determination, and the first element relating to the degree of advantage of the player in the bonus game are included in the execution period of the bonus game. A first element favoring unit that makes it more advantageous for a player to keep the game ball being fired in the first direction than to keep the game ball being fired in the second direction during a specific period; and The second element different from the element is characterized in that it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period. And a two-element advantage means. Game machine F1 to butterflies.

  Here, in the case of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port is a prize, the state shifts to a winning state in which a large winning port is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. There is something. In such a conventional gaming machine, a predetermined privilege that is advantageous to a player such as a prize ball is given by causing a game ball to be awarded to a special winning opening during a winning state, so that the player The state can be played as one fun.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to fire the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine in order to win the gaming ball to the special winning opening, and in addition to the advantage degree in the hit state ( Since the amount of the predetermined privilege that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a possibility that the hit state may be like an operation of simply firing game balls in a predetermined direction. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the launching means is configured to be able to launch at least game balls in the first direction and the second direction different from the first direction. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and the bonus game advantageous to the player is performed by the bonus game execution unit based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination unit. The first factor relating to the degree of advantage of the player in the bonus game is that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction rather than the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the bonus game. Is favored by the first element favoring means. The second factor relating to the degree of advantage of the player in the bonus game is that the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the bonus game. Is favored by the second element favoring means.

  This allows the player who wants to make the first element to be advantageous to fire the game ball in the first direction during the execution of the bonus game, while the player wants to make the second element advantageous. A game ball can be fired in two directions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide gaming properties that match the taste of each player.

  In the gaming machine F1, ball-in means provided at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction and a game ball fired in the second direction are provided at least in a ball-in position, and to the ball-in means. And a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball, a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the ball entry means than the first position. And a variable means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times during execution of the privilege game. A gaming machine F2 comprising: a control unit.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. That is, the ball entry means is provided at a position where at least a game ball launched in the first direction and a game ball launched in the second direction can enter. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting means based on the game ball having entered the ball-receiving means. The variable means is changed to a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which it becomes more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. During execution of the bonus game, the variable means changes the predetermined number of times from the second position to the first position by the variable control means.

  This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means, and thus has the effect of further improving the interest during the execution of the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine F2, the first element advantageous means may be configured such that a game ball is continuously fired in the first direction rather than a game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. The game machine F3 is characterized in that the ratio of entering a ball into the ball entry means is increased.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F2, it is more preferable that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. Since the ratio of entering the ball entry means is increased by the first element advantage means, the player who wants to play a game during the execution of the privilege game with a high game ratio of entering the ball entry means is provided. On the other hand, there is an effect that the game ball can be positively fired in the first direction.

  In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the second element favoring means is configured to continuously emit the game ball in the second direction during the specific period, rather than continuously firing the game ball in the first direction. A game machine F4 wherein the number of game balls reaching the ball entry means is increased.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is more preferable that the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period. Since the number of game balls reaching the ball entry means is increased by the second element advantage-making means, the player who wants to have more game balls reach the ball entry means must be positively in the second direction. There is an effect that the game ball can be fired.

  In the gaming machine F4, the variable control means performs a first variable operation in which the variable means is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the variable means was changed to the first position. The first number of times is executed during a specific time period, and the second element advantage means includes: a game ball fired in the first direction since the specific time period is started, having a predetermined number of times of the first ball. It is to suppress reaching the ball entry means until the execution period of the variable operation ends, at least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation of the predetermined number of times, the specific period A gaming machine F5, which is a period in which a game ball fired in the second direction is reachable from the start.

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F4. That is, the first variable operation in which the variable means is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the variable means was changed to the first position is executed by the variable control means a first number of times during the specific period. Is done. It is determined by the second element advantage means that the game ball fired in the first direction from the start of the specific period reaches the ball entry means before the execution period of the predetermined number of first variable operations ends. Is suppressed. At least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation of the predetermined number of times is constituted by a period in which the game ball fired in the second direction can reach after the start of the specific period.

  This allows the game ball to be fired in the second direction to reach the ball entry means during execution of the first variable operation a greater number of times than when the game ball is fired in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that more opportunities to enter the ball into the ball entry means can be obtained.

  In the gaming machine F5, the second element advantage-making means is configured such that a period until the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball-entering means is a time period in which the game ball fired in the second direction is A gaming machine F6 characterized by suppressing the falling speed of a gaming ball fired in the first direction so as to be longer than a period until the ball reaches the entry ball means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F5, the period until the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball-entering means is the time when the game ball fired in the second direction enters the ball. Since the falling velocity of the game ball fired in the first direction is suppressed by the second element advantage-making means so as to be longer than the period until reaching the means, the game ball fired in the first direction is Thus, it is possible to more reliably prevent the vehicle from reaching the ball entry means before the predetermined number of first variable operations is completed. Therefore, firing the game ball in the second direction has the effect of increasing the chances of more reliably entering the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine F5 or F6, in the first variable operation, a period from the start of the change from the second position to the first position to the end of the change to the first position is predetermined. The variable means is changed so as to be in a second period, and the first element advantageous means is provided so that a game ball fired in the second direction is transferred to the ball entering means during the second period. And that the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period more easily enters the ball entry means than when it reaches A gaming machine F7 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5 or F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first variable operation, the variable means is set such that a period from the start of the change from the second position to the first position to the end of the change to the first position is a predetermined second period. Is varied. A game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period, compared with a case where the game ball fired in the second direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period. This makes it easier for the first element advantage means to enter the ball.

  Thereby, when the game ball is fired in the first direction, in addition to the first period in which the variable means is changed to the first position, also in the second period in the middle of changing from the second position to the first position. Since there is a possibility of entering the ball entry means, firing the game ball in the first direction can extend the period during which the player can enter the ball entry means. Therefore, it can be said that firing the game ball in the first direction can increase the possibility that the game ball reaching the ball entry means enters the ball entry means as compared with the case where the game ball is fired in the second direction. effective.

  In the gaming machine F7, a game ball fired in the first direction can flow down, and a first flow path for allowing the flown down game ball to reach the ball entry means from a third direction, and in the second direction A second flow path that allows the launched game balls to flow down, and allows the flowed down game balls to reach the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction, wherein the variable means comprises: While being changed to the second position, the upper surface thereof is configured such that the game ball can flow down, and the upper surface is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. Wherein the ball entry means allows a game ball to enter from above in a state where the variable means is changed to the first position, and the variable means is provided in the second position. In the state where it is variable, the upper part is The first element advantage-making means slides the variable means in a direction from the third direction to the fourth direction, thereby causing the variable means to move toward the fourth direction. A gaming machine F8 which is variable from the two positions to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine F8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F7. That is, the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means from the third direction by the first flow path. The game ball fired in the second direction reaches the ball entry means by the second flow path from a fourth direction different from the third direction. While the variable means is being changed to the second position, a game ball can be played on the upper surface thereof. The upper surface of the variable means is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. In a state in which the variable means is changed to the first position, the game ball can enter the ball-in means from above, while in a state in which the variable means is changed to the second position, the ball-in means Is closed by the variable means. When the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, the first element advantage means slides the variable means in a direction from the third direction to the fourth direction.

  Thereby, the game ball which is fired in the second direction and reaches the upper surface of the variable means from the fourth direction side during the second period, is returned to the fourth direction side by the inclination of the upper surface of the variable means. Since gravity can be applied, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, the third direction side above the ball entry means is ready to enter the ball from above faster than the fourth direction side, so it is fired in the first direction, and from the third direction side during the second period. A game ball that has reached the ball entry means can be easily entered. Therefore, the game ball fired in the first direction can more reliably increase the ball entry rate when reaching the ball entry means than the game ball fired in the second direction.

  In any one of the gaming machines F2 to F8, if the game ball does not enter the ball-entering means during execution of one of the privilege games, the game state after the execution of the privilege game is over. Game state setting means for setting one game state and setting a second game state more advantageous than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one privilege game. A gaming machine F8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F2 to F8, the gaming ball is transferred to the ball entry means during execution of one privilege game as a gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. When the ball is not entered, the first game state is set by the game state setting means. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one privilege game, a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state is set by the game state setting means. Accordingly, when the game ball enters the ball entry means, the game state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the advantageous second game state, so that the game ball enters the ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to play a game during execution of the privilege game by paying attention to whether or not to play.

<Characteristic G group> (A route that is easy to win the electric chute but hard to win the attacker and a route that is easy to win the attacker but hard to win the electric chew are provided on the right side)
A launching means capable of firing a game ball, a first flow path through which a game ball fired at a firing intensity within a specific range by the firing means can flow, a second flow path different from the first flow path, A first ball entry means in which a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and a game ball flowing down the second flow path is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter the ball; A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball having entered the ball means, a first position at which game balls can enter the first ball entry means, and a first position A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter the first ball entry means, and the variable means is moved from the second position to the first position based on a predetermined specific condition being satisfied. A variable control means for varying the position, a game ball flowing down the second flow path is capable of entering, and the first Game machine G1 which game balls flowing down the road is characterized in that it comprises a second ball entrance means provided in ball entrance difficult position.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a plurality of entrances provided on the board. More specifically, a game ball has entered, such as a starting port that triggers a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a hit state, or a large winning opening that allows game balls to enter when transitioning to a hit state. In some cases, a plurality of entrances where different controls are performed are provided. In such a conventional gaming machine, since the entrance to be aimed at is changed according to the game state, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of variably pointing the firing direction according to the game state.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the game becomes monotonous because the game ball must be continuously fired in the firing direction according to the current game state until the game state is changed. There is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, there is also a method of providing a specific entrance where a plurality of firing directions in which game balls can enter are set, and in at least one game state, aiming at the specific entrance and playing a game. Although it is conceivable, there is a problem that the degree of freedom of the board surface configuration is reduced by a plurality of flow paths toward a specific entrance.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the game ball fired by the firing means at a firing intensity within a specific range can flow down the first flow path and the second flow path different from the first flow path. Become. The first ball entry means is provided at a position where game balls flowing down the first flow path can enter, and game balls flowing down the second flow path are difficult to enter. A predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege provision means based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position at which a game ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second position at which it becomes more difficult to enter the first ball entry means than the first position. I have. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the variable control means based on a predetermined specific condition being satisfied. A second ball entry means is provided at a position where game balls flowing down the second flow path can enter, and game balls flowing down the first flow path are difficult to enter.

  By launching the game ball with a launching intensity within a specific range, the game ball may flow into the first flow path and the second flow path, so that attention is paid to the downward flow of the game ball. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, the first flow path is such that a game ball fired at a firing intensity within the first range included in the specific range can flow down, and the second flow path is in the specific range. A gaming machine G2, wherein a gaming ball fired at a firing intensity included in a second range different from the first range can flow down.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1. That is, game balls fired at a firing intensity within the first range included in the specific range can flow down the first flow path. Also, a game ball that is included in the specific range and fired with a firing intensity within a second range different from the first range can flow down the second flow path.

  Thereby, the flow path into which the game ball flows can be made different depending on whether the game ball is fired with the firing intensity within the first range or the game ball with the firing intensity within the second range. A game ball can be caused to flow into an arbitrary flow path. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G2, a third flow path in which game balls fired at a firing intensity outside the specific range can flow down, and it is difficult for the flown down game balls to enter the second ball-in means. And a third ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the third flow path, the second ball entry means, and the third ball entry means when the game ball enters the third ball entry means. A first game state and a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. Game state setting means for setting a game state of the third ball, wherein the first game state is higher than the ratio of game balls flowing down the second flow path into the second ball input means, by the third state. The rate at which game balls flowing down the flow path enter the third ball entry means increases, The second game state is such that the game balls flowing down the second flow path enter the second ball input means more than the ratio of game balls flowing down the third flow path entering the third ball input means. The ratio of entering the ball increases, and the variable control means determines that the specific condition is satisfied by the determination by the determination means, and that the variable means changes the second position from the second position to the second position. A gaming machine G3 for executing a variable game that is changed to a single position a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine G3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G2. That is, the third flow path is configured such that game balls fired at a firing intensity outside the specific range can flow down. The game ball that has flowed down the third flow path can enter the third ball entry means, and it is difficult to enter the second ball entry means. A determination is performed by the determination unit based on a game ball having entered one of the second ball entry unit and the third ball entry unit. Based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, one of the plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state is set by the game state setting means. Is done. In the first game state, the ratio of game balls flowing down the third flow path entering the third ball entry means is less than the ratio of game balls flowing down the second flow path entering the second ball entry means. Is higher. In the second game state, the rate at which game balls flow down the second flow path enter the second ball entry means is less than the rate at which game balls flow down the third flow path enter the third ball entry means. Get higher. A variable game in which the variable means is biased from the second position to the first position by a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable control means, as the specific condition is satisfied when the specific result is obtained by the determination by the determination means.

  Thus, in the first game state, it is more efficient to perform the determination by the determination means by flowing down the third flow path, while in the second game state, it is more preferable to flow down the second flow path. The determination by the determination unit can be efficiently executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of switching the firing direction of the game ball according to the game state.

  In the gaming machine G3, the first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path and a game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter the ball. A gaming machine G4 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path and a game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter the ball. Since it is provided, there is an effect that the player can select a favorite flow path during execution of the variable game.

  In the gaming machine G4, the period until the game ball fired toward the first flow path reaches the first ball input means is the time when the game ball fired toward the third flow path is the third flow path. A gaming machine G5 comprising: a suppression device that suppresses a flow of a game ball in the first flow path so as to be longer than a period until the ball reaches one ball entry device.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G4, the period until the game ball fired toward the first flow path reaches the first ball entry means is shifted toward the third flow path. Since the flow-down of the game ball in the first flow path is suppressed by the suppression means so as to be longer than the period until the fired game ball reaches the first ball-in means, the first game ball is quickly executed during the execution of the variable game. 1 For a player who wants to reach the ball entry means, a game ball can be fired aiming at the third flow path, while for a player who wants to enjoy the variable game for a longer time, There is an effect that a game ball can be fired aiming at the first flow path.

  In the gaming machine G5, the firing means is capable of firing a game ball at a firing interval equal to or longer than a specific firing interval, and the variable control means controls the second variable means during execution of the variable game. A first variable for changing the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined number or more of game balls entering the ball entry means after being changed from the position to the first position; Control means, and during execution of the variable game, changing the variable means to the first based on a lapse of a predetermined period of time after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. Second variable control means for changing the position to two positions, wherein the specific number of times the specific number of shots are fired at the specific firing interval since the specific period starts firing game balls toward the first flow path Game ball is the first flow path Gaming machine G6, characterized in that than period until after flowing down at least long.

  According to the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G5. That is, the firing means is configured to be able to fire the game ball at a firing interval equal to or longer than a specific firing interval. During execution of the variable game, the first variable control is performed based on the fact that a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered the ball entry means since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position. The variable means is changed to the second position by the means. In addition, during execution of the variable game, based on the fact that a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position, the second variable control means sets the variable means to the second position. Is changed to The specific period is longer than the period from when the game balls are launched toward the first flow path until the specific number of game balls fired at the specific firing intervals finish flowing down the first flow path. It is configured to be.

  Thereby, when a game ball is fired in the first flow path, it is possible to prevent the variable means from being changed to the first position before a specific number of game balls reach the first ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a predetermined privilege given when a game ball is fired into the first flow path during execution of the variable game from decreasing.

  In any of the gaming machines G4 to G6, when the variable means is changed to the first position, the first ball-entering means is more than the game ball flowing down the third flow path when the variable means is changed to the first position. A gaming machine G7 characterized in that a game ball having flowed down a flow path is configured to have a higher ratio of entering the ball.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G4 to G6, when the variable means is changed to the first position, the first flow is reduced more than the gaming ball flowing down the third flow path. Since the first ball entry means is configured so that the ratio of the game balls flowing down the road to the ball is higher, the variable game is executed for the player who does not want to generate a useless ball. In addition, there is an effect that the game ball can be fired aiming at the first flow path.

  In any one of the gaming machines G3 to G7, a third position at which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position at which a game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the third position. A variable second variable means, and control means for controlling the second variable means to change from the fourth position to the third position based on satisfaction of a first condition, The gaming machine G8 is characterized in that the first gaming state is more difficult to satisfy the first condition than the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines G3 to G7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second variable means is configured to be variable between a third position at which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position at which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the third position. Have been. Based on the first condition being satisfied, the control means controls the second variable means to change from the fourth position to the third position. The first game state is configured to be more difficult to satisfy the first condition than the second game state.

  Thereby, in the first game state, it is possible to more efficiently execute the determination by the determination means by flowing down the third flow path, while in the second game state, the second flow path is made to flow down. This has the effect that the discrimination by the discriminating means can be executed more efficiently and more reliably.

<Characteristic H group> (Informs the firing direction of the corresponding digestion time according to the mode of the jackpot effect)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first flow path through which a gaming ball launched in a first direction by the launching means can flow, and a launching means for launching in a second direction different from the first direction. A second flow path through which the game balls can flow, a specific period setting means for setting a specific period based on the first condition being satisfied, and after the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, A specific period ending means for ending the specific period based on a second condition that can be satisfied when a game ball flows down the first flow path or the second flow path; And at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect as a type of the specific effect performed by the specific effect executing device. 1 out of multiple types Type determining means for determining a type, suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect for suggesting a launch direction of a game ball in the specific period, and the suggestion effect executed by the suggestive effect execute means, Means for determining a first suggestion effect indicating the first direction based on the determination of the first specific effect, and suggesting the second direction based on the determination of the second specific effect. A gaming machine H1 comprising: a suggestion effect determining means for determining a second suggestion effect.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a plurality of entrances provided on the board. More specifically, a game ball has entered, such as a starting port that triggers a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a hit state, or a large winning opening that allows game balls to enter when transitioning to a hit state. In some cases, a plurality of entrances where different controls are performed are provided. In such a conventional gaming machine, since the entrance to be aimed at is changed according to the game state, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of variably pointing the firing direction according to the game state.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the game becomes monotonous because the game ball must be continuously fired in the firing direction according to the current game state until the game state is changed. There is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, there is also a method of providing a specific entrance where a plurality of firing directions in which game balls can enter are set, and in at least one game state, aiming at the specific entrance and playing a game. Although it is conceivable, there is a problem that the degree of freedom of the board surface configuration is reduced by a plurality of flow paths toward a specific entrance.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the game ball fired in the first direction by the firing means capable of firing the game ball can flow down the first flow path, and is fired in the second direction different from the first direction by the firing means. The game ball can flow down the second flow path. The specific period is set by the specific period setting means based on the first condition being satisfied, and after the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, the game ball passes through the first flow path or the second flow path. The specific period is ended by the specific period ending means based on the establishment of the second condition that can be satisfied when the flow falls. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means during the specific period. As the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, one type is determined from a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect. In the specific period, a suggestion effect indicating the launch direction of the game ball is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. While the first suggestion effect indicating the first direction is determined by the suggestion effect determination unit based on the fact that the first specific effect is determined by the type determination unit as the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution unit. A second suggestion effect indicating the second direction is determined based on the determination of the second specific effect.

  Thus, an appropriate launch direction can be suggested by the suggestive effect according to the type of the specific effect, so that there is an effect that the effect mode can be appropriately set.

  The gaming machine H1 includes ball entry means provided at a position where game balls flowing down the first flow path and game balls flowing down the second flow path can be entered, and the second condition is The game can be established based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means, and the second flow path is provided such that a game ball which has flowed down from the first flow path is supplied to the ball entry means. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that the period until the arrival is easily extended.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1. That is, ball entry means is provided at a position where game balls flowing down the first flow path and game balls flowing down the second flow path can enter. The second condition is established based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means. The second flow path is configured such that a period until the game ball that has flowed down from the first flow path reaches the ball entry means is likely to be longer.

  With this, when the second specific effect is determined, the period until the second condition is satisfied can be made relatively long, so that a sufficient effect period for executing the second specific effect is secured. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine H2, it can be changed to a first position at which game balls can enter the ball entry means, and a second position at which game balls can not enter the ball entry means than the first position. A variable means, a determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, and the variable means changing the second position to the first position from the second position based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. And a variable game execution unit that executes a variable game that is variable a predetermined number of times. The specific period setting unit sets the specific period as the first condition is satisfied when the execution of the variable game is started. A gaming machine H3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H2. That is, the variable means can be configured to be variable between a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball cannot enter the ball entry means than the first position. Have been. A discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by a predetermined number of times based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discriminating means. It is executed by the variable game execution means. Assuming that the execution of the variable game has been started, the first condition is satisfied, and the specific period setting means sets the specific period.

  Thereby, during the execution of the variable game, there is an effect that the effect mode can be appropriately set.

  In either of the gaming machines H2 and H3, the second condition is satisfied when a predetermined specific number of game balls enter the ball entry means after the first condition is satisfied. Gaming machine H4 characterized by:

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect provided by either the gaming machine H2 or H3, the second condition is that a predetermined specific number of gaming balls enter the ball entry means after the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, firing the game ball in the second direction can make the period until the second condition is satisfied longer than firing the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that a sufficient effect period for executing the second specific effect can be secured.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, when the second specific effect is determined by the operation means operable by the player and the type determining means, the operation is performed during the execution period of the second specific effect. Operation validity period setting means for setting an operation validity period for validating an operation on the means, wherein the second specific effect is one effect mode corresponding to an operation content on the operation means from a plurality of effect modes. The selection effect execution which performs the one effect mode selected by the player during the execution of the second specific effect based on the satisfaction of the second condition, A gaming machine H5 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine H5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines H1 to H4. In other words, when the second specific effect is determined by the type determining unit, the operation valid period for validating the operation on the operation unit is set by the operation valid period setting unit during the execution period of the second specific effect. The second specific effect is constituted by an effect of causing the player to select one effect mode according to the operation content of the operation means from among a plurality of effect modes. Based on the satisfaction of the second condition, one effect mode selected by the player during execution of the second specific effect is executed by the selected effect execution means.

  With this, when the second specific effect is executed, the effect mode that is desired by the player can be selected as the effect mode to be executed after the second condition is satisfied, so that the second condition is satisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game later.

  In the gaming machine H5, display means capable of displaying an image is provided, and in the second specific effect, a plurality of images corresponding to each of the plurality of effect modes are displayed on the display means, and the plurality of images are displayed. And at least one display mode in which one image is displayed in a specific display mode. Based on detection of an operation of a first operation content on the operation unit during the operation valid period, the identification is performed. A mode changing means for changing an image displayed in the display mode, and displaying in the specific display mode based on detection of an operation of a second operation content on the operation means during the operation valid period. A game machine H6 comprising: an execution setting unit that sets an effect mode corresponding to an image being displayed as an effect mode executed by the selected effect execution unit.

  According to the gaming machine H6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H5. That is, in the second specific effect, at least a display mode in which a plurality of images corresponding to each of the plurality of directing modes are displayed on the display means, and one of the plurality of images is displayed in a specific mode. include. The image displayed in the specific display mode is changed by the mode changing unit based on detecting the operation of the first operation content on the operation unit during the operation valid period. Based on the detection of the operation of the second operation content on the operation unit during the operation valid period, the effect mode corresponding to the image displayed in the specific display mode is determined by the execution setting unit by the selected effect execution unit. This is set as an effect mode to be executed.

  Thus, by changing the operation content of the operation means, there is an effect that the selection of the image and the determination of the effect can be easily performed by the player.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, when the second specific effect is determined by the operation means operable by the player and the type determining means, the operation is performed during the execution period of the second specific effect. Operation validity period setting means for setting an operation validity period for validating an operation on the means, wherein the second specific effect includes at least an effect mode for prompting a predetermined operation on the operation device. Gaming machine H7.

  According to the gaming machine H7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4. That is, when the second specific effect is determined by the type determining unit, the operation valid period for validating the operation on the operation unit is set by the operation valid period setting unit during the execution period of the second specific effect. The second specific effect includes at least an effect mode for prompting a predetermined operation on the operation means.

  This allows the player to positively operate the operating means during the execution of the second specific effect, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machines H5 to H7, operation determining means for determining whether or not an operation has been performed on the operating means during the operation valid period, and the operation determining means continuously for at least a predetermined number of operation valid periods. A determination control unit configured to control the first suggested effect to be determined by the suggested effect execution unit when it is not determined that the operation on the operation unit has been performed by the unit. Machine H8.

  According to the gaming machine H8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines H5 to H7. That is, the operation determining unit determines whether or not the operation on the operating unit has been performed during the operation valid period. The determination control means such that the first suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect execution means when it is not determined that the operation on the operation means has been performed by the operation determination means continuously for at least a predetermined number of operation valid periods. Is controlled by

  Thus, the type of the suggested effect can be determined in consideration of the tendency of the player to operate the operating means, and thus the effect of setting the effect mode more appropriately can be obtained.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Gaming machine Z1. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko game machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode so that balls can be won, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including data written on a magnetic card as well as a prize ball) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being fused. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, , A predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
111 Payout control device (part of privilege giving means)
112 Launch control device (Launch means)
650a Right specific winning opening (ball entry means)
650f1 Opening / closing door (part of the first element advantage means, variable means)
700 Detour role (part of the second element advantage means)
S214 Privilege game execution means S305 Judgment means S1103 Part of first element advantage means, variable control means S1203 Part of privilege provision means

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, and it is difficult to improve the interest in the game of Yu technique's.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a firing unit capable firing into the game area Yu skill sphere, a first flow path game ball that is fired possible flow down by its firing means, A second flow path different from the first flow path, a first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and a game in the first ball entry means. A first variable means that can be changed to a first position at which a ball can enter, and a second position at which a game ball is more difficult to enter the first entering means than the first position; A second ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the two flow paths can enter, a third position at which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, and a third position thereof real variable capable second varying means in a fourth position where game balls becomes difficult ball entrance to the second ball entrance means than the determination on the basis of the establishment of the determination condition And discriminating means for, and benefits game execution means for executing an advantageous benefits the player to the player based on the fact that a determination result determined result certain predetermined for the determination means, during the execution of the specific privilege game A first privilege is given based on that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means during execution of the privilege game. A privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege having a lower degree of advantage than the first privilege based on the first privilege , and the second variable means being in the fourth position during execution of the predetermined privilege game. Means for changing the first variable means to the first position while the variable means is being changed, and means for changing the first variable means to the second position during the execution of the predetermined privilege game. Means for changing the second variable means to the third position; During execution of the serial specific privilege game, than the first ball entrance means such that said game balls to the second ball entrance means is more likely to ball entrance, the said first varying means first and a control means for controlling at least one of the second variable means.

Gaming machine of claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, Ru comprising a display means capable of displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result of said discriminating means.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a firing unit capable firing into the game area Yu technique balls, game ball that has been fired and the first flow path capable falling by its firing means, and a first flow path A different second flow path, first ball entry means provided at a position where game balls flowing down the first flow path can enter, and game balls can enter the first ball entry means. First variable means which can be changed to a first position, a second position at which game balls are more difficult to enter the first ball entry means than the first position, and a game flowing down the second flow path A second ball entry means provided at a position where a ball can enter, a third position at which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, and the second ball entry than the third position a determination means for performing a fourth position where game balls becomes difficult ball entrance, a variable can be a second variable means, the determination on the basis of the establishment of the determination condition means, that determine And benefits game execution means for discriminating result of the means to perform the advantageous benefits the player to the player based on the fact that a specific determination result that is determined in advance, the first ball entrance means during execution of the specific privilege game The first privilege is provided based on the game ball having entered the first privilege, and the first privilege is provided based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means during execution of the privilege game. A privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege having a lower degree of advantage than the privilege changing means, and wherein the second variable means is changed to the fourth position during execution of the predetermined privilege game. Means for changing the first variable means to the first position, and setting the second variable means to the second position while the first variable means is changed to the second position during execution of the predetermined privilege game. Means for changing to three positions and execution of the predetermined privilege game In, than the first ball entrance means such that said game balls to the second ball entrance means is more likely to ball entrance, at least one of said second varying means and said first variable means and a control means for controlling, the.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being fused. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, , A predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a win. In such a gaming machine, a predetermined game value is given to a player by causing a game ball to enter a special winning opening that is opened during a winning state, so that the player is provided with one pleasure to win. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, during the hit state, there may be a case where the player simply shoots the game ball in a predetermined direction aiming at the winning opening, so that the player's There was a problem that it was difficult to improve the interest in the game.
The technical idea is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of a player in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is based on a first direction, a firing means capable of firing at least a game ball in a second direction different from the first direction, and a determination condition. Discriminating means for executing a discriminating operation, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discriminating means, and an advantage of the player in the privilege game. The first element relating to the degree is determined by the game direction in which the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction, rather than the game ball being continuously fired in the second direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the privilege game. The first element advantage means, which is advantageous to the player, and the second element different from the first element are provided in the second direction rather than the game balls being continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period. Player who keeps firing ball Comprising a second element advantageously means that advantageously, a.
The gaming machine according to the second technical concept is the gaming machine according to the first technical concept, wherein the gaming ball fired in the first direction and the gaming ball fired in the second direction are at least at positions where they can enter. Provided ball entry means, privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means, and a game ball which can enter the ball entry means. A variable position that can be changed to a first position and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry device than the first position, and a predetermined number of times the variable device is determined during execution of the privilege game. , Variable control means for changing from the second position to the first position.
The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein the first element advantage-imparting means is configured such that the gaming ball continues to be fired in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. Also, the rate at which the game ball continues to be fired in the first direction increases the rate of entering the ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the second or third aspect, wherein the second element favoring means is arranged in the second direction rather than the game balls being continuously fired in the first direction. The one in which the game balls are continuously fired increases the number of game balls reaching the ball entry means during the specific period.
The gaming machine according to the technical concept 5 is the gaming machine according to the technical concept 4, wherein the variable control unit is configured to execute a predetermined first period after the variable unit is changed to the first position. Performing the first variable operation to be changed to the second position for the first number of times during the specific period, wherein the second element favoring means performs the first variable operation after the specific period starts. The game ball fired in the direction is prevented from reaching the ball entry means until the execution period of the predetermined number of the first variable operations ends, and the predetermined number of the first variable operations is suppressed. At least a part of the operation execution period is a period during which the game ball fired in the second direction can reach after the specific period is started.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the determination is executed based on the first direction and the launching means capable of firing the game ball at least in the second direction different from the first direction, and the determination condition is satisfied. Discriminating means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating means, and a first related to the advantage degree of the player in the privilege game. It is advantageous for the player that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during a specific period included in the execution period of the privilege game. The first element advantage means and the second element different from the first element are used so that the game ball is fired in the second direction rather than the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period. The player who continues to play Comprising an element advantageous means, a.
As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a game ball fired in the first direction and a game ball fired in the second direction are formed. At least a ball entry means provided at a position where the ball can be entered, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means, and a game ball provided to the ball entry means. A variable position which can be changed to a first position where the ball can enter the ball, and a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball entering device than the first position, and the variable device during execution of the privilege game. And a variable control unit that changes the first position from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times.
Thereby, there is an effect that the interest during the execution of the bonus game can be further improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the first element advantage-making means may be arranged in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. The rate at which the game balls are continuously fired in the first direction is higher than the rate at which the game balls are continuously fired in the first direction than the time when the game balls are continuously fired. There is an effect that a player who wants to play a game during execution of a privilege game with high game performance can positively fire a game ball in the first direction.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 or 3, the second element advantage means is configured to reduce a case where the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction. In addition, since the number of game balls reaching the ball entry means during the specific period increases when the game balls continue to be fired in the second direction, more game balls are entered. There is an effect that a player who wants to reach the means can positively fire a game ball in the second direction.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the variable control means is determined in advance after the variable means is changed to the first position. The first variable operation that is changed to the second position after the elapse of the first period is performed the first number of times during the specific period, and the second element advantage-making means is configured such that It is intended to prevent a game ball fired in the first direction from being started from reaching the ball entry means before a predetermined number of execution periods of the first variable operation ends. At least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation of the predetermined number of times is a period during which the game ball fired in the second direction can reach after the start of the specific period.
Thereby, the player who shoots the game ball in the second direction sends the game ball to the ball input means during the execution of the first variable operation a larger number of times than when the player plays the game ball in the first direction. Since it is possible to reach the ball, there is an effect that the chance of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be increased.

Claims (5)

Launching means capable of firing at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction;
Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a determination condition;
Privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific result of the determination by the determination means,
The first element relating to the degree of advantage of the player in the privilege game is set in the first direction rather than in the second direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the privilege game. A first element advantage means that makes it more advantageous for the player that the player is continuously fired,
A second element different from the first element is more advantageous to the player if the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period. And a second element advantageous means. A game ball launched in the first direction, and a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter at least
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on that a game ball has entered the ball entry means,
A variable means that can be changed to a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position at which it becomes more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position;
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: a variable control unit that changes the variable unit from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times during the execution of the privilege game. .   The first element advantage-making means may be configured such that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction rather than the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game, 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the ratio of entering a ball is increased.   The second element advantage-making means may reach the ball entry means during the specific period when game balls continue to be fired in the second direction, rather than game balls continue to be fired in the first direction. The gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the number of gaming balls to be played is increased. The variable control unit performs a first variable operation that is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the variable unit was changed to the first position during the specific period. Performing the first number of times;
The second element favoring means may be configured such that the game ball fired in the first direction after the specific period starts and before the execution period of the first variable operation for a predetermined number of times ends. Means to reach the means,
At least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation of the predetermined number of times is a period in which game balls fired in the second direction can reach after the specific period is started. The gaming machine according to claim 4.

Images